Isc 100% Success in Physics

EVERGREEN MODEL TEST PAPERS
EVERGREEN
SERIES
ISC 100% SUCCESS IN PHYSICS-12
SOLUTION FOR EVERGREEN MODEL TEST PAPERS
EVERGREEN MODEL TEST PAPER - 1

PART-I
Answer 1.
20
(A) (i) (c) Electrostatic potential V (x)= = 20 (x2 4)1
x2 4
As we know that,
dV 40 x
Electric field, E = = 20 (1) (x2 4)2 2x = 2
dx ( x 4) 2
40 4 160 10
At x = 4 m, E = 2 = = V/m
(16 4) 144 9
E is along the positive X-direction.
(ii) (c) Now, current through resistance R is given by
E E 2E
I= and I = = < 2I
R+r R R + 2r
+ r
2
(iii) (d) A uniform magnetic field B inside the current carrying long solenoid is acting along the axis of solenoid.
The magnitude of force on the electron of charge (e) moving with velocity v in a magnetic field B is
| F | = e | v B | = ev B sin
F = 0 [_ = 0]
Thus, electron will continue to move with a uniform velocity along the axis of the solenoid.
(iv) (d) When the aperture is reduced to half, area of cross-section becomes one-fourth. Therefore, exposure
time should be made 4 fold.
(v) (a) It is because all the electrons in the atom are not being subjected to one single central force.
(B) (i) The net electric flux coming out of a closed surface is zero because net charge on electric dipole is zero.
(ii) The two resistances are in parallel and the third resistance is connected in series with them.
R
A B
R R
R 3
RAB = +R= R
2 2
(As two resistances are in parallel with each other and third one is in series)
3
= 2=3 [putting R = 2 ]
2
(iii) Given, resistance = 3.5 k 5% = 35 102 5%
Colour code of a given resistance is orange, green, red and gold.
(iv) When no current is drawn from a cell by the electric circuit.
(v) The direction of a uniform magnetic field and motion of electron are either parallel or anti-parallel to each
other.
(vi) Yes, it is necessary that the amplitude be constant over a given wavefront into a homogeneous medium.
(vii) The reflected and refracted rays are perpendicular at the polarising angle of incidence given by
tan ip = 3 , ip = tan 1 3 = 60
(viii) Focal length of a convex lens is related to its refractive index () as
1
f 1
As w g < a g, so focal length of the convex lens will increase when it is immersed in water.
(1) e-mail : epildelhi@gmail.com

EVERGREEN
SERIES
(ix) Yes, we can increase the range of a telescope by increasing the diameter of its objective because the light
gathering power of objective will increase and even faint objects will become visible.
(x) The relation between the angle of emergence e and the angle of deviation of light ray passing through a
prism is given by
i + e =A+
where, i is angle of incidence and A is angle of prism.
(xi) The energy difference between two adjacent levels decreases with the increase in the value of quantum number n.
(xii) It means that the amount of radon in a given sample will become half of its original amount in 3.8 days.
(xiii) The nuclei having equal number of neutrons are called isotones,
e.g., 3Li7, 4Be8 and 11Ne23, 12Mg24.
(xiv) The heavy water acts as a moderator to slow down the fast neutrons emitted in the fission of uranium.
(xv) It is defined as the minimum distance between the transmitter and the receiver at which they can see each
other.
PART-II
SECTION-A
Answer 2.
(a) Consider a circular loop of wire of negligible thickness radius a and centre O held perpendicular to the
plane of the paper. Let the loop carry a total charge +q distributed uniformly over its circumference.
At point P on the axis of the loop, where

OP = r
Consider a small element AB is
q
dq = dl ...(i)
2a
1 dq
|dE| = 2 , along CP at with the axis
4 0 (r + a 2 )
But dE is resolved into two components dE sin along FY and dE cos along PX. The components of
electric field intensity perpendicular to the axis will cancel i.e., dE sin = 0.
The resultant electric field intensity E at P is
| E | = dE cos
OP r
From OPC, cos = = 2
CP ( r + a 2 )1/ 2
1 dq r
|E| =
4 0 ( r + a ) ( r + a 2 )1/ 2
2 2 2
1 q dl r qr
Using eq. (i), we get | E | = 2 = dl
4 0 2a ( r + a )
2 3/2
4 0 2a(r 2 + a2 )3 / 2
qr (2a) qr
= = , along X-axis.
2
4 0 2a (r + a ) 2 3/ 2 4 0 (r + a 2 )3 / 2
2
(b) Given, q1 = + 15 C = 15 106C and q2 = + 9 C = 9 106C

r1 = 18 cm = 18102 m and r2 = (18 3) cm = 15 102 m

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Work done, W= ?
q1 q2 q1 q2 q1 q2 1 1
W = PE2 PE1 = =
4 0 r2 4 0 r1 40 r2 r1
15 10 6 9 10 6 10 10
2 2
= = 1.35 J
22
8.85 10 12
15 18
4
7
Answer 3.
(a) In Fig. (a), the arrangement is equivalent to two capacitors connected in parallel.
A
Each capacitor has the area of plate .
2
Equivalent capacitor is given by
K1 0 A / 2 K2 0 A / 2 K1 + K 2 o A
C = C1 + C2 = + =
d d 2 d
In Fig. (b), the arrangement is equivalent to two capacitors connected in series in which the distance between
the plate of each capacitor is d/2.
Equivalent capacitance is
K1 0 A K 2 0A
.
C=
C1C2
= d /2 d / 2 = K1 K 2 2 0 A
C1 + C2 K1 0A K 2 0 A K1 + K 2 d
+
d /2 d /2
(b) The end error in the meter bridge is due to the following reasons :
(i) The zero mark of the scale provided along the bridge wire may not start from the position where the
bridge wire leaves the copper wire and 100 cm mark of the scale may not be at position, where the
bridge wire just touches the other copper strip.
(ii) The resistances of the connecting wires and copper strips of meter bridge have not been taken into
account.
The end error can be removed by repeating the experiment by interchanging the known and unknown
resistances and taking the mean of the resistances determined.
Answer 4.
V 2 1002
(a) Resistance of heater, R = = = 10
P 1000
When the heater is in the circuit, let potential difference across heater be V, then
V2
62.5 = V2 = 625 V= 25 V
10
V 25
Current through heater, I2 = = = 2.5 A
R 10
Voltage drop across 10 resistor connected in series with the heater
= 100 25 = 75 V
75
Main current = = 7.5 A
10
Current through resistance, R = 7.5 2.5 = 5 A
25
Resistance, R = =5
5
(b) In Wheatstone bridge, we use the null method for measuring the resistance. In this method, instrument errors
do not matter and null position can be obtained more accurately. In other method, we measure the potential
difference and the current with the help of ordinary voltmeter and ammeter respectively.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Answer 5.
(a) The circuit is redrawn and current distribution is shown below :
Using Kirchhoffs second rule,

In the closed circuit DCBD, we have
3 + I 3 + 1 + 1 1 + I1 2 =0
4I + 2I1 =2
2I + I1 =1 ... (i)
In the closed circuit DBAD, we have
I1 2 + (I I1) 2 2 + l + (I I1) 1 = 0
3I 5I1 = 1 ...(ii)
From eq. (i) and (ii), we have
2I+I1 = 3I 5I1 I = 6I1
Substituting the value of I in eq. (i), we get
1 1 6
12I1 + I1 = 1 I1 = 1 = 6 = A
13 13 13
1 2
Potential difference across BD = 2 = = 0.154 V
13 13
6 39 18
Potential difference across G = 3 3 = = 1.61V
13 13
6 19
Potential difference across H = 1 + 1 = = 1.46 V
13 13
(b) The material P is diamagnetic substance and material Q is superconductor. The effect illustrated in Fig. (b)
is Meissner effect as superconductor expelled the magnetic flux completely.
Answer 6.
(a) Let the figure represents the section of solid metal wire of radius R perpendicular to its length.
(i) Let the point P be lying inside the wire at perpendicular distance r from the
axis of the wire. Consider a circular path of radius r around the axis of the R
wire. By symmetry, the magnetic field produced due to the current flowing
in the wire at any point over this path is tangential to it and equal in magnitude O r P
at all points on this path.
I I r2
Current enclosed by the closed path = r 2 =
R 2 R2
Line integral of B over this closed path is
I r2
B.dl = B 2r = 0 r
R2
[from Amperes circuital law]
0 r I r2
Ir
B = = 0 r2
2
2 r R 2 R
(ii) When point P is outside the wire, r > R, so that the current enclosed by the closed path = I. According
to Amperes circuital law
0 I
B.dl = 0 I or B 2r = 0 I =
2r
EVERGREEN
SERIES
(b) The inductive time constant of an LR circuit is defined as, the time in which the current decays from
maximum to 0.368 of the maximum value.
Its relation is expressed as I = 0.368 I0
where, I0 is peak current and I is instantaneous current.
L
Time constant, =
R
where, L is inductance and R is resistance.
Answer 7.
(a) Given, Potential across inductor, VL = 200 V,
Potential across resistance, VR = 150 V,
Root mean square current, Irms = 5 A,
Impedence, Z = ?, = ?
(i) Resultant voltage
Vrms = V 2L + V 2R = (200)2 + (150)2 = 250 V
Vrms 250
Z = I = = 50
rms 5
(ii) Phase angle between voltage and current
VL 200 4
= tan1 = tan 1 = tan 1 = 53
VR 150 3
(b) In the series circuit, for a given instantaneous current I =10sin t, the voltages across L and C are,
respectively.
E = E0 sin (t + 90) and E = E0 sin (t 90)
Thus, they are 180 out of phase.
In parallel circuit, for a given instantaneous voltage E = E0 sin t, the currents through L and C are,
respectively.
I = I0 sin (t 90) and I = I0 sin (t + 90)
Thus, the currents are 180 out of phase.
SECTION-B
Answer 8.
(a) Consider a plane wavefront AB incident on a plane surface XY separating two media 1 and 2 as shown in
the figure. Let v1 and v2 be the velocities of light in the two media, with v2 < v1.
N
Incident
B wavefront
1
S v1t
i
i Rarerv1
X r Y
A C Denserv
2
r vt 2
2
Refracted
D wavefront
The wavefront first strikes at point A and then at the successive points towards C. According to Huygens
principle, from each point on AC, the secondary wavelets start growing in the second medium with speed
v2. Let the disturbance take time t to travel from B to C, then BC = v1t. During the time the disturbance
from B reaches the point C, the secondary wavelets from point A must have spread over a hemisphere of
radius AD = v2t in the second medium. The tangent plane CD drawn from point C over this hemisphere of
radius v2t will be the new refracted wavefront.
Let the angles of incidence and refraction be i and r, respectively.
From right ABC, we have
BC
sin BAC = sin i =
AC

EVERGREEN
SERIES
From right ADC, we have
AD
sin DCA = sin r =
AC
sin i BC v1i sin i v1 1
= = v t or sin r = v = 2 [a constant]
sin r AD 2 2
This proves Snells law of refraction. The constant 12 is called the refractive index of the second medium
with respect to first medium. Further, since the incident ray SA. the normal AN and the refracted ray AD
are respectively perpendicular to the incident wavefront AB, the dividing surface XY and the refracted
wavefront CD (all perpendicular to the plane of the paper), therefore, they all lie in the plane of the paper,
i.e., in the same plane. This proves another law of refraction.
(b) Huygens principle of secondary wavelets is used to find the position of a wavefront after sometime.
Answer 9.
(a) In first case, slit separation, d = 1.5 mm = 1.5 103 m
In second case, D = 1 + 0.5 = 1.5 m
Distance of the screen
D = 1m
Width of 10 fringes = 3.93 mm
3.93
Fringe width, = = 0.393 mm = 0.393 103 m
10
d 0.393 103 1.5 103
Wavelength, = = = 5.895 107 m
D 1
In second case, D = 1 + 0.5 = 1.5 m
d = 1.5 103 m, = 5.895 107
10D
Width of 10 fringes, 10 =
d
10 1.5 5.895 107
= = 5.895 103 m = 5.895 mm 6 mm
1.5 103
(b) The labelled diagram showing the polarisation of light.
Polariser Analyser
Maximum
intensity
P A
Unpolarised
light Plane polarised
light
P A No light
Answer 10.
(a) For the convex lens :
Focal length f = + 15 cm, Object distance u = 40 cm, Image distance v = ?
From thin lens formula,
1 1 1 1 1 5 1
= + = = = v = + 24 cm
v f u 15 40 120 24
The image I formed by the convex lens serves as object for the concave lens
u = + (24 14) = 10 cm, v = + 30 cm, f = ?
1 1 1 1 1 2 1
= + = = =
f v u 30 10 30 15
f = 15 cm
(b) The sequence of colours in the secondary rainbow reverse of that in the primary colour because a secondary
rainbow is formed by two total internal reflections : light in water droplets while a primary rainbow is formed
by just one total internal reflection.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Answer 11.
(a) Working : When the final image is formed at the least distance of distinct vision. The object AB to be
viewed is placed at distance u0, slightly larger than the focal length f0 of the objective O. The objective
forms a real, inverted and magnified image A B, of the object AB on the other side of the lens O as shown
in the figure. The separation between the objective O and the eyepiece E is so adjusted that the image A
B, lies within the focal length fe of the eyepiece. The image A B acts as an object for the eyepiece which
essentially acts like a simple microscope, The eyepiece E forms a virtual and magnified final image A B
of the object AB Clearly, the final image A B is inverted with respect to the object AB.
u0 v0
A Fe
h F0 F'e B'
B" B F'0 h'
Objective
A'
h" Eyepiece
ve
A"
D
A
h

B D
Magnifying power : The magnifying power of a compound microscope is defined as the ratio of the angle
subtended at the eye by the final virtual image () to the angle () subtended at the eye by the object, when
both are at the least distance of distinct vision from the eye.
tan h / ue h D
m = = = = = m0 me
tan h / D h ue
h v0
Here, m0 = =
h u0
As, the eyepiece acts as a simple microscope. So
D D
me = u = 1 + f
e e
v0 D
m = u = 1 + f
0 e
As the object AB is placed close to the focus F0 of the objective, therefore,
u0 f0
Also, image AB is formed close to the eye lens whose focal length is short, therefore, v0 L = the length
of the microscope tube or the distance between two lenses.
v0 L
m0 = u = F
0 0
L D
m = f = 1 + f [for final image at D]
o e
(b) Total magnification m = m1 m2 m3 = 2 3 10 = 60
SECTION-C
Answer 12.
(a) (i) For the minimum cut-off or threshold frequency,
Energy of incident photon h0 = Work function W0
W0 2.14 eV 2.14 1.6 10 19

0 = = = J = 5.16 1014 Hz
h 34
6.6310 Js 6.63 10 34

EVERGREEN
SERIES
(ii) When photoelectric current becomes zero, maximum kinetic energy of photoelectron = Potential energy
due to the stopping potential V0.
hc
KEmax = eV0 W0 = eV0

hc
=
eV0 + W0
6.60 1034 3 108 19.89 1026 19.80 10 26

= = =
(0.60 + 2.14) eV 2.74 2.74 1.6 10 19
= 453.7 109 m = 453.7 nm
h
(b) de-Broglie wavelength, = , where h is Plancks constant, m is mass to electron and E is kinetic
2mE
energy.
When kinetic energy of electrons is made 4E, let its wavelength becomes , then
h h
= =
2m 4E 2 2mE

Thus, = 2 or =
2
Answer 13.
(a) Let min1 and min2 be the minimum wavelengths of emitted X-rays at potential differences V1 and V2,
respectively. Then,
hc hc
min = eV and min = eV
1 1 2 2
Increases potential difference from V1 to V2, the percentage change in minimum wavelength is
min 1 min 2 V2 V1 30kV 20kV
100 = = 100 = 100 = 33%
min1 V2 30kV
(b) The variation of binding energy per nucleon with mass number of different nuclei is shown below :
Most stable nuclei
Nuclei prone
to fission
Nuclei prone
to fission
Here, horizontal axis show variation in mass number and vertical axis shows variation in binding energy per
nucleon (in MeV).
Answer 14.
(a) (i) Number of atoms present in 11 g of the sample = 6.023 1023
Number of atoms present in 2.2 mg of the sample
6.023 1023 2.2 103
= 1.2 1020 atoms
11

EVERGREEN
SERIES
(ii) Number of atoms present in 5 g of the sample

6.023 1023 5 10 6
= = 2.74 1017 atoms
11
0.693 0.693 2.74 1017
Activity of the sample R = N = N = = 1.55 1014 disintegrations/second
T1/ 2 1224
(b) Number of atoms in 1 g of
235 Avogadros number 6.023 1023

92 U = =
Mass number 235
Energy released per fission = 200 MeV
Energy released by fission of 1 g of
6 0231023
235
92 U = 200
235
= 5.126 1023 MeV
= 5.126 1023 1.6 1013 J
5.126 10 23 1.6 10 13 J
= = 2.278 104 kWh
3.6106
Answer 15.
(a) The circuit diagram of a p-n-p transistor in common emitter amplifier is shown below. Here, emitter-base
circuit is forward biased by a low voltage battery VBE and hence the resistance of input circuit is small.
The collector-emitter circuit is reverse biased by a high voltage battery VCC.
p-n-p IC
C
IB
B
RL
E
VCE V0
V VBE
IE VCC
VBE
The output is amplified and has a phase change or (180).
Out of phase
Input
a.c. signal Amplified
output
(b) X is NAND gate and Y is NOR gate.
Input A Input B Output of Output of

NAND gate NOR gate
Y = A.B Z = A+Y
1 1 0 0
0 1 1 0
EVERGREEN
SERIES

PART-I
Answer 1.
(A) (i) (b) When the point is situated at a point on diameter away from the centre of hemisphere is charged
uniformly positively, the electric field is perpendicular to the diameter. The components of electric
intensity parallel to the diameter cancel out.
(ii) (a) To keep the current in the circuit unchanged, a resistance R is connected in series of shunted
galvanometer. It will be
SG
G = +R
S+G
G = galvanometer resistance
where, S = shunt resistance
SG G2
R =G =
S+G S+ G
(iii) (c) Inside a magnet, the direction of magnetic lines of force is from South to North Pole. The magnetic
lines of force form a closed path.
(iv) (c) When velocity of electron increases, the momentum of electron increases and hence the
D
de-Broglie wavelength also decreases. The fringe width is = , so . Hence, fringe width
d
() decreases as decreases.
(v) (d) The transition n = 2 to n = 1 has maximum energy gap. Therefore, energy emitted is maximum and
hence frequency of photon emitted is maximum.
(B) (i) A capacitor with a dielectric would store more charge as its capacity increases.
(ii) A conductor will become a superconductor if its temperature becomes equal to or less than its critical
temperature.
(iii) On increasing the current drawn from a cell, the potential difference of its terminals is lowered because
of the internal resistance r of the cell. We know that terminal potential difference
V = E Ir
If I is increased, V will be lowered.
(iv) There will be no deflection in the galvanometer as the condition of balanced bridge will still hold good.
0 I
(v) We know that, original magnetic field B =
2r
0 2I 4 0 I
and changed magnetic field B = = = 4B
2(r / 2) 2r
So, the new magnetic field is four times the previous value.
(vi) No, two wavefronts cannot cross each other. If they intersect, then there will be two rays or two directions
of propagation of energy at the point of intersection which is not possible.
(vii) We know that, ip + rp = 90
ip= incident angle of polarisation, rp= reflected angle
rp= 90 ip = 90 56.3 = 33.7
(viii)In a telescope, the objective should have large focal length than the eyepiece. So, the lens of 50 cm focal
length will be used as objective.
(ix) The power of a lens represent its ability to converge or diverge a beam of light. Smaller its focal length,
larger is its bending powder. So, power is expressed as the reciprocal of its focal length.
(x) No, it simply deviates the ray.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
(xi) Energy is given by

13.6
En = eV [n = number of orbit]
n2
If n=
En = 0
(xii) The two radioactive elements are 216 and Po212 .
85At 84 Their half-lives are extremely small.
(xiii) Isobars : 12Mg24, 11Na 24 and 11 Na 23, Ne23.
10
Isotones : 11Na24, 10Ne23.
(xiv)Thermal neutrons are those which come into thermal equilibrium with a moderator at NTP. They have an
energy of about 0.03 eV.
(xv) Frequency modulation is required for commercial broadcast of voice signals.
PART-II
SECTION-A
Answer 2. R
(a) Suppose a non-conducting solid sphere of radius R and centre O has
uniform volume density of charge .We need to calculate electric
field intensity E at any point P with OP = r. Hence, O as centre and r n
as radius, imagine a sphere S, which acts as a Gaussian surface. At every r E
S
point of S magnitude of E are same directed radially outwards as shown O P r
in figure. If q is the charge enclosed by the sphere S, then according
to Gausss law.
q
E.ds = E. n ds = E ds =
S
where, is electrical permittivity of the material of the insulating sphere.
q q
E (4r2) = E = ...(i)
4r 2
4 3
Now, charge inside S i.e., q = volume of S volume density of charge = r
3
4 r 3 r
Substituting the value of q in eq. (i), we get E = =
3 4r 2 3
At centre of sphere , r = 0
E = 0
At surface of sphere, r = R
R
E = = maximum.
3
(b) Given, K.E. = 10 J, V1 = 100 V, V2 = 200 V and q = ?
Work done = charge q potential difference
But K.E. = work done
K.E. 10 10
q= = = = 0.1C
p.d. 200 100 100
Answer 3.
(a) Capacitors C1 and C2 are in series, then
C1 C2 10 15 150
C = C + C = 10 + 15 = 25 = 6 F
1 2
Now, capacitors C and C3 are in parallel, then
C = C + C3 = 6 + 20 = 26 F
(i) Charge on C1 and C2 is given by
Q = C V = 6 F 100 V = 600 C
(ii) Charge on C3 is Q3 = C3V = 20 100 = 2000 C
1 Q 32 1 1
Stored energy, U = = Q3 V = 2000 100 = 105 J = 0.1 J
2 C3 2 2

EVERGREEN
SERIES
(b) The circuit diagram of potential divider is shown as below, where r is variable resistance.
S V
V
A B
r
E K
E is emf of the battery and K is switch.
Answer 4.
(a) Resistance across arm BCDE = 7 + 1 + 10 = 18
Resistances 18 and 6 are in parallel, then effective resistance
18 6 18 6
RP = = = 4.5
18 + 6 24
Total resistance of the circuit = 2 + 4.5 + 8 + 0.5 = 15
15
Current through the battery, I = = 1A
15
Potential difference across B and E = I RP = l 4.5 = 4.5 V
Power dissipated as heat due to resistance
V2 (4.5)2
P = = = 3.38 W
R 6
(b) Sometimes the balance point in the potentiometer is not obtained because of the following :
(i) The emf of the driver cell may be greater than the potential difference across the whole wire of the
potentiometer.
(ii) The connections may be wrong. E1 = 2V I1
5. (i) The circuit diagram is redrawn as shown alongside : A B
r1 = 4
For loop ABCFA, we have
E1 + I1 r1 I2 r2 = 0 I2 E2 = 1V I2
F C
2 + 4I1 3I2 1 = 0 r2 = 3
4I1 3I2 = 1 ...(i) E = 4V
I3 3 I3
For loop FCDEF, we have E D
E2 + I2r2 + I3r3 E3 = 0 r3 = 2
1 + 3I2 + 2I3 4 = 0
3I2 + 2I3 = 3 ...(ii)
At junction C, I3 = I2 + I1 ...(iii)
From eqns. (ii) and (iii), we have
3I2 + 2(I1 + I2) = 3
2 I1 + 5 I2 = 3 ....(iv)
Solving eqns. (ii) and (iv), we have
2 7
I1 = A and AI2 =
13 13
2 7 9
I3 = I1 + I2 = + = A
13 13 13
(b) (i) Copper is diamagnetic and behaviour of magnetic field lines will be as shown below figure :
Copper

EVERGREEN
SERIES
(ii) Aluminium is paramagnetic.
Answer 6.
(a) Consider an elementary ring of radius r thickness dr whose centre lies on the axis
of the conductor. Area of the elementary ring, dA = 2rdr. The current passing dr
through the elementary ring is r
dI = JdA = (kr2) (2rdr) = k 2r3 dr
whereas, J = Current density
Total current passing through the closed path of radius r is

r kr 4
I = 0 k 2 r 3 dr =
2
Using Ampere circuital law, we have
0 r kr 4
B dI = 0 rI B. 2r =
4
0 r kr 4
B =
4
(b) Instantaneous current (I) during its growth in an LR circuit is given below :
I = I0 [1e(R/L)t]
where, I0 is the final equilibrium current.
1
For I = I0 , we have
2
1
I0 = I0 [1 e (R/L)t ]
2
1 (R/L)t
e (R /L)t = 2 e =2
L 80
t = log e 2 = (0.69) = 1.104
R 50
Answer 7.
(a) Given, L = 35 mH = 35 103 H, R = 11 , Vrms = 220 V

= 50 Hz = 250 = 100
2
22
Inductive reactance, XL = L = 2 50 35 103 = 11
7
Impedance of the circuit. Z = R 2 + X 2L = 112 + 112 = 11 2
Voltage amplitude, V0 = 2 Vrms = 2 220 V
V0 220 2
Current amplitude, I0 = = = 20 A
Z 11 2
XL 11
Phase difference, = tan1 = tan 1 = = 45
R 11 4
R R
(b) The power factor is given by cos = =
Z 2
1
R 2 + L
C
By adjusting C, the value of Z can be made to approach R, so that cos 1.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
SECTION-B
Answer 8.
(a) Consider a plane wavefront AB incident on the plane reflecting surface XY, both the wavefront and the
reflecting surface being perpendicular to the plane of paper as shown in the figure.
Incident Reflected
wavefront wavefront
N N
Y A D
S
i r
X i r Y
B C
First the wavefront touches the raws reflecting surface at B and then at the successive points towards
C. In accordance with Huygens principle, from each point on BC, secondary wavelets start growing
with the speed c. During the time disturbance from A reaches the point C, the secondary wavelets from
B must have spread over a hemisphere of radius BD = AC = ct, where t is the time taken by the disturbance
to travel from A to C. The tangent plane CD drawn from the point C over this hemisphere of radius ct
will be the new reflected wavefront. Let angles of incidence and reflection be i and r, respectively, In
ABC and DCB,
we have
BAC = CDB [each is 90]
BC = BC [common]
AC = BD [each is equal to ct]
ABC DCB
Hence, ABC = DCB or ir
i.e., the angle of incidence is equal to the angle of reflection. This proves the first law of reflection.
Further, since the incident ray SB, the normal BA and the reflected ray BD are respectively perpendicular
to the incident wavefront AB, the reflecting surface XY and the reflected wavefront CD (all of which
are perpendicular to the plane of the paper), therefore, they all lie in the plane of the paper, i.e., in the
same plane. This proves the second law of reflection.
(b) The geometrical shape of the wavefront of light is spherical with point source at the centre of the sphere.
Answer 9.
(a) Let x be the distance of point P from the centre of screen.
When red light ( = 6000 ) is used, nth bright fringe is obtained at point P.
n D nD 6000 10 10
x= =
d d
When green light ( = 5000 ) is used, (n + 1)th the bright fringe is obtained at the same point P.
(n + 1) D ( n + 1) D 5000 1010
x = =
d d
Equating the two values of x, we get
nD 6000 1010 (n + 1) D 5000 1010
=
d d
6n = 5 (n + 1)
n = 5
(b) The pictorial representations are as shown below :
Unpolarised light
(a ) (b )
Plane polarised light
(a ) (b )
EVERGREEN
SERIES
Answer 10.
(a) For convex lens f = + 10 cm , u = 30 cm, v = ?
1 1 1 1 1 2 1
Using lens formula, = + = + = = or v = + 15 cm
v f u 10 30 30 15
This image is at 10 cm from the concave lens which is placed at 5 cm from the convex lens. It will act as a
virtual object.
For concave lens u = + 10 cm, f = 10 cm and v = ?
1 1 1 1 1
= + = + =0
v f u 10 10
v =
Hence, the final image is formed at infinity. The image formation is shown as below.
30 cm 5 cm
10 cm
(b) In the position of minimum deviation, the rays of different colours will suffer almost the same deviation
and they can be focussed on the same screen.
Answer 11.
(a) When an object AB is placed between the focus F and optical centre O of a convex lens, a virtual, erect and
magnified image AB is formed on the same side of the lens as the object. Since, a normal eye can see an
object clearly at the least distance of distinct vision D (=25 cm), the position of the lens is so adjusted that
the final image is formed at the distance D from the lens as shown in the figure.
A
L
A A
F
B F B O
Eye
x
D
Angle subtended by theimage at the least distance of distinct vision

Then, magnifying power =
Anglesubtended by the object at the least distance of distinct vision
As the eye is held close to the lens, the angles subtended at the lens may be taken to be the angles subtended
at the eye. The image A B is formed at the least distance of distinct vision D. Let A OB = . Imagine the
object AB to be displaced to position A B at distance D from the lens. Let A OB = .
tan
Then, magnifying power, m =
tan
A B/B A B/B AB / OB
= = = [_ A B =AB]
A B/ AB/ AB / OB
B D D
= = or m =
x x
Let f be the focal length of the lens. As the image is formed at the least distance of distinct vision from the
lens. So, v = D
1 1 1
Using thin lens formula, =
v u f

EVERGREEN
SERIES
1 1 1 1 1 1 D D
We get = = + =1+
D x f x D f x f
D
m=1+ , where value of D in diopter
f
Thus, shorter focal length of the convex lens, the greater is its magnifying power,
(b) Given, R0 = 120 cm, m = 20, fe = ?
f 0 R 0 / 2 120 / 2
fe = = = = 3cm
m m 20
SECTION-C
Answer 12.
(a) Here, = 300 nm = 3 107 m, V0 = 0.54 V
(i) Energy of incident photon,
hc 6.63 10 34 3 108 19 6.63 1019
E= = = 6.63 10 J = eV = 4.14 eV
3 10 7 1.6 1019
(ii) Kmax = eV0 = 0.54 eV
(iii) Again, Kmax = h W0
W0 = h Kmax = 4.14 0.54 = 3.6 eV
h
(b) de-Brogile wavelength is given by =
2 mk
mk = constant [for same ]
Since, mass of electron is less than that of proton, the electron has higher kinetic energy and it is moving faster.
Answer 13.
(a) When electrons accelerated through a potential difference V strike a target, the maximum frequency of
the emitted X-rays is given by
eV = hmax
where, e is the charge of electron and h is Plancks constant. But max = c/min, where c is the speed of
light and min is the minimum wavelength.
hc hc
eV = min =
min eV
Here, V = 2475 kV = 2475 103 V
Substituting the known values of h, c and e, we have
eV = hmax
(6.6 10 34 J s )(3.0 108 ms 1 )
min = = 0.5 1010 m = 0.5
(1.6 10 19 C) (24.75103 V)
The momentum of the emitted X-rays photon is
h 6.6 10 34 Js
p = = =13.2 10 24 kg ms 1
min
0.5 10 10 m
(b) An -particle contains two protons and two neutrons.
Mass of two protons = 2 1.007825 = 2.015650 amu
Mass of two neutrons = 2 1.008665 = 2.017330 amu
Total mass = 4.032980 amu
Mass of He nucleus = 4.002800 amu
Mass defect, m = 0.030180 amu
BE of -particle = 0.030180 931 = 28.098 MeV
Answer 14.
(a) The half-life of polonium is 138 days.
Amount of undecayed Po left after 138 days = 50% of initial amount
Amount of undecayed Po left after next 138 days = 25% of initial amount
Amount of undecayed Po left after next 138 days = 12.5% of initial amount
Amount of undecayed Po left after next 138 days = 6.25% of initial amount
Total time lapsed = 138 4 = 552 days.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
(b) The fission of 98 Mo can be represented as

42
98
42 Mo + 10 n 249
21 Sc + Q
The disintegration energy in the fission of 98 Mo is given by

42
Q = m
( 98
42 Mo )+m n
49
2m(21 Sc) C2

= [97.90541 + 1.00867 2 48.95002]
931.5MeV
amu C2 = [98.91408 97.90004) amu
amu
= 1.01404 931.5 = 944.6 MeV
Answer 15.
(a) An n-p-n circuit diagram of a transistor as a common base amplifier is shown as below figure :
n-p-n
IE E C IC
B RL
Vi
VEB VCB IC
Input
a.c. IB Amplifier
voltage VCC
output
VEE
Base (B), collector (C) and emitters (E) and corresponding currents are labelled in the diagram. Input is
applied across emitter-base and output is taken across collector-base as shown in figure.
(b) The gates G1 = OR gate and G2 = AND gate.
From the given circuit diagram, we can write Y1 = A + B, Y2 = (Y1) (C) = [(A + B)] C
For A = 0, B = 0, C = 0 Y1 = 0, Y2 = 0 A = 1, B = 1, C = 0, Y2 = 0

EVERGREEN
SERIES
PART-I
Answer 1.
(A) (i) (a) Here, two capacitors of capacity C and KC are in series, therefore,
C KC KC
the net capacity is = .
C + KC 1+ K
(ii) (c)
(iii) (b) Since the substance is freely attracted, it is paramagnetic.
(iv) (d)
1 1 1
(v) (a) Use =R 2 2
n f ni
(B) (i) The electric flux enclosed is zero because net charge enclosed is ( + q q) = 0.
(ii) When the temperature increases, the resistance of conductor increases, hence the relaxation time
decreases.
(iii) Due to the excitation of the nerve system, the nerve gets depolarised.
(iv) Yes.
(v) Its path is helical because the velocity has a component in the direction of the magnetic field.
(vi) A wide source is equivalent to a large number of narrow source. Each source will produce its own
interference pattern which will overlap and interference pattern will not be clear.
(vii) tan ip = 1.7327, ip = tan1 1.7327 = 60.
(viii) The focal length of the lens will increase and its power will decrease.
(ix) Yes, because heavenly bodies are spherical. Its inversion will not matter and image will remain the
same.
(x) Yes, because the refractive index for material of the prism is different for different colours.
27.2
(xi) En =
n2
27.2
For n = 3, E3 = = 3.02 eV
9
(xii) The radioactive decay law is
dN
= N
dt
where N is the number of atoms at any time and is the radioactive decay constant.
(xiii) Applying conservation law for mass number, X must be a zero mass number and zero charge number. It
must be neutrino.
(xiv) Control rods are used in the nuclear reactor to control the rate at which the nuclear reaction proceeds.
It absorbs neutrons in excess if any.
PART-II
SECTION-A
Answer 2.
(a) Let be the charge density on the sheet A. To find the intensity at the point P due to the sheet A. Consider a
cylindrical Gaussian surface passing through the sheet. The electric intensity at P due to the charge A is
directed away the charge. Let S be the face area of the cylinder. The electric intensity perpendicular to the
curved surface is zero.
A B
+ +
Charge enclosed by the Gaussian surface r = S + +
+

P
E . ds = E . ds + E . ds + +

Curved surface S + +

EVERGREEN
SERIES

E . ds = 0 + EA S [ E || ds ]
= EAS ... (i)
Also, by Gauss law
Q S
E . ds =
0
=
0
... (ii)
From (i) and (ii), we have

S
EAS =
0

EA = away from the sheet A
0
Similarly, EB at P due to sheet B is

EB = towards the sheet B
0

Net electric field at P = EA + EB = +
0 0
2
E = towards the ve sheet.
0
(b) We know that
1 2
E = . ... (i)
4 0 r
Here, = ?, r = 0.02 m, E = 9 104 NC1
Putting the various value in (i), we have
2
9 104 = 9 109
0.02
9 104 0.02
= = 107 cm1
9 109 2
Answer 3.
(a) Let C1 and C2 be the capacities of the two charges. When the two charged spheres are connected, charge on
them will be redistributed and the two conductors will acquire a certain common-potential V.
Charge Q 1 on the first conductor, Q 1 = C 1 V and charge Q 2 on the second conductor C 2 is
Q2 = C2 V.
Q1 CV C
= 1 = 1 i.e., in the ratio of their capacities.
Q2 C2V C2
(b) Let AB be the length of a potentiometer wire and I be the current passing through it due to some outside
source. Then potential difference V across the entire length L of the wire having a resistance r is
E
+ K
A
B
V = Ir
L L
V =I r =
A A
Now, if the wire is of uniform area of cross-section and current passing through it is constant, then
V
= Constant (_ is also a constant for the material of the wire)
L
V
=e
L

EVERGREEN
SERIES
In general, Vl
Thus, the fall of potential across a certain length of the potentiometer is proportional to the length, if the wire
is of uniform area of cross-section and a constant current passes through it.
Answer 4.
(a) Here, resistor of 2 and 8 are in parallel and so or 4 and 6 . The two resistances are then in
series.
82 6 4
The equivalent resistance of these two combinations = +
8+2 6+4
= 1.6 + 2.4 = 4
Now, 3 , 4 and 6 resistors are in parallel.
Their resistance R is given by
1 1 1 1 8+6+4
= + + =
R 3 4 6 24
24 4
R = =
18 3
4 2
Equivalent resistor of the combination = + =2
3 3
Current I in the circuit is
V 1.8
I = = = 0.9 A
R 2
4
Potential difference across the parallel combination = 0.9 = 1.2 V
3
1.2
Current through 3 resistance = = 0.4 A
3
Power consumed by the whole circuit = E I
= 1.8 0.9
= 1.62 V
(b) A potentiometer is said to be sensistive if it can measure even a very small potential difference. For this
the potential gradient must be very small and hence the length of the potentiometer wire must be long.
Answer 5.
(a) Applying first law at the point A R1 R2 R3
A B
I2 + 8 = 15 or I2 = 15 8 = 7 A I5 A I2 3A
Current through the resistance R5 = 8 5 = 3 A R6 R4
8A I4
I4 = 7 + 3 = 10 A D C
and I1 = I4 + 3 = 10 + 3 = 13 A
R8
5 A I3 I1
(b) A neat sketch of the cycle of magnetisation is as shown in the fig.
D
O A
Hysteresis loop
E
Answer 6.
(a) Here, I0 = 3 A, r = 5 cm = 0.05 m
Current per unit area of cross-section
3A
J =
(0.05)2

EVERGREEN
SERIES
To find the magnetic induction at point P at a distance of 4 cm from the axis, we have to find the current
contained with in a sphere of radius 4 cm. It is given by
3 16 3 48
L = J A= (0.04)2 = =
(0.05)2 25 25
Magnetic field at the point P
0r 2I
B=
4 d
48
= 107 2 1000
25 4 102
= 9.6 104 T = 9.6 103T
(b) When a capacitor is connected to a source of charge (say a battery), it is immediately charged to the potential
of the battery. However, if the capacitor is charged through a resistor, it takes sometime to charge. Actually, it
takes infinite time to acquire the potential of the battery. Capacitive time constant CR is defined as the time
in which is charged to 63.2% of its final value. Larger value of time constant will mean that its rate of charging
is slow.
Answer 7.
(a) Here, L = 1.5 H, C = 35 F, R = 20 , EV = 200 V
When the supply frequency equal the natural frequency, the circuit is in resonance. The circuit will become
resistive, having a resistance of 20 and Z = R.
E V E V 200
Current in the circuit = = = = 10 A
Z R 20
Power consumed by the circuit = EV EV cos 0 (_ = 0)
= 200 10 1 = 2000 W
(b) In a LR circuit, Z = L22 + R 2
L
and tan =
R

In this case, the current lags behind the applied voltage by 90 or the voltage is ahead of the current by .
2
Thus, (t I) and (t V) graphs are shown below.
180 360
270
0 t
90
V = V0 sin t

I = I0 sin ( t 2
)
SECTION-B
Answer 8.
(a) In the figure below is shown the behaviour of a plane wavefront as it strikes :
(i) A prism (ii) A thin convex lens (iii) A concave mirror
The emergent wavefront is always plane.
Concave mirror
Incident of radius R
plane wave Incident Incident
plane wave F plane wave
F
Spherical wavefront
Spherical wavefront of radius R/2
of radius f
(a) (b) (c)

EVERGREEN
SERIES
In the fig. (a) is shown a plane wavefront strikes a prism. The distance covered by the refracted wavefront in
air passing through the thick portion will be less in air as compared will the distance covered by the wavefront
passing through the thin portion of the prism as shown in the fig. The refracted wavefront will be as shown
in fig. (a). In fig.(b), since the lens is thick at the centre, more distance in air will be covered by the disturbance
passing through the upper and lower portions of the lens than the portion through the central portion of the
lens. Hence, the shape of the refracted wavefront is as shown. Similar arguments apply to the wavefront
suffering reflection from the concave mirror.
(b) The contribution of the wavelets at any point depends on the factor (1 + cos ). For a point on the back of
the wavefront = 180.
The factor (1 + cos ) becomes (1 cos 180) = 0.
Hence, there is no contribution at the point behind the wavefront.
Answer 9.
(a) The path difference between the two disturbances starting from the two coherent source is
x
=d ,
D
where x is the distance of the point from the central bright fringes. The path difference for the 3rd bright
fringe is 3
= 3 5000 = 3 5000 10 10 m
= 1.5 10 6 m
2 2
Phase difference = .p= . 3 = 6

Similarly, at the dark fringe, path difference p is

p = (2n 1)
2
For the third dark fringe, n = 3

p = (2 3 1) =5 I0
2 2
5
= 5000 1010 I
2
25
107 = 12.5 107 m
=
2
p = 1.25 106 m 0 45 90 135 180
Phase difference = 5 Angle of rotation
The required graph is as shown in the fig. alongside :
When the axis of the polariser and the analyser are parallel, the intensity is maximum. As increases to
90, the intensity of emerging become is reduced to zero. Rotation of the analyser from 90 to 180 again
increases the intensity to maximum as shown.
Answer 10.
(a) Here, for the convex lens u = 15 cm, v = ?, f = 20 cm
Now, for a lens
1 1 = 1
f
v u
1 1 1
+ =
v 15 20
1 1 1 3 4 1
= = =
v 20 15 60 60
v = 60 cm
This image serves as an object for the second lens. Let the focal length of the lens be f. For this lens
u = (60 + 20) = 80 cm
v = 15 cm

EVERGREEN
SERIES
1 1 1
Applying =
v u f
1 1 1
+ =
15 80 f
15 80
f= = 12.63 cm
95
(b) Yellow sodium light is used in fog condition because it can pass through fog without being scattered away
and hence can reach the observer.
Answer 11.
(a) The ray diagram by which the image of a distant object is formed by a telescope is as shown in the fig. The
telescope is shown to be in normal adjustment. Magnifying power of a telescope is defined as the ratio of the
angle subtened by the final image to the angle subtened by the object when both are at infinity.
From the fig.,
tan
M = = (since and are small, they can be replaced by their tangents)
tan
From objective at
AB Objective
Eyepiece
AO AC
= AB =
AO A

AC c C
B
f0 From
M = f0 fe
fe
where f0 = AC = focal length of objective lens
fe = AO = focal length of the eye lens.
(b) Distance between the objective and the eye lens in normal adjustment is
= CA + AO
= f0 + fe
SECTION-C
Answer 12.
(a) Here, = 2271 = 2271 108 m
Wattage of the source = 100 W
VS = 1.3 V
0 =?
Energy of the incident photon
c
E=h

6.62 1034 3 108
= eV
1010 2271 1.6 1019
= 5.47 eV
Work function = E eVS
= (5.47 1.6 1019 1.6 1019 1.3) J
= 1.6 1019 [5.47 1.30]
= 1.6 1019 4.17 J
4.17 1.6 1019
= eV
1.6 1019
= 4.17 eV
(b) de-Broglie wavelength is given by
h
= , where p is the momentum of the particle.
p

EVERGREEN
SERIES
For the photon of wavelength
c
E = h

E h
p = =
c
Putting this value of p in the equation
h h
= =
=
p h
de-Broglie wavelength is equal to the wavelength of the quantum.
Answer 13.
(a) Here, V = 18 103 V, v = ?, min = ?
We know that
1
eV = mv 2
2
2eV
v =
m
2 1.6 10 19 18 103
=
9.1 10 31
2 1.6 18
= 1015
9.1
2 1.6 18 10
= 107 ms1
9.1
= 7.96 107 ms1
(b) Here, the mass defect m = 0.042 amu
Energy released in the process = 0.042 931.5 MeV = 39.102 MeV
39.102
Binding energy per nucleon = MeV
7
= 5.586 MeV
Answer 14.
(a) Radioactivity of a radioactive substance is defined as the rate of disintegration of the atoms of the radioactive
substance. According to radioactive decay law, the number of atoms distintegrating per sec. is proportional
to the number of atoms present at that time. If N is the number of atoms present at any instant t, then
dN
N
dt
dN
or = N, where is a constant called the radioactive decay constant of the
dt
radioactive substance.
From above
dN
= dt
N
Integrating both sides, we have
N t
loge N = dt , where N0, N is the number of atoms of the substance at
N0 0
t = 0 and at t = t
[log N]N
N = [ t ]0
t
0
N
ln = t
N0

EVERGREEN
SERIES
N
= et
N0
N = N0et
Since the activity is proportional to the number of atoms, the relation N = N0 et may be written as
R = R0et
(b) Here, m ( 42 He ) = 4.002604 amu
m 12
6 C = 12.00000
Since (
3 42 He )
12
6 C
Mass of 3 particles = 3 4.002604
= 12.007812 amu
Mass defect = 12.007812 12.00000
= 0.007812 amu
Energy released = 0.007812 931.5 MeV
= 7.27 MeV
Answer 15.
From the given graph
(i) Output resistance of a transistor in CE configuration is defined as the ratio of the change in the collector
voltage to the change in the collector current.
VCE 10 8 2 103 = 20 k
R0 = = =
IC (3.6 3.5) 103 0.1
(ii) d.c. current gain : It is defined as the ratio of the collector current to the base current
4.5 103
= = 112.5
40 106
(iii) a.c. current gain : It is defined as the ratio of the change in the collector current to the change in the
base current.
IC
= = 120
IB
(b) The Boolean expression for the combination
Y3 = A . B
Y4 = A . B
Y = A . B + A . B which is the Boolean expresion for the XOR gate.

The logic table may be written as
A B Y3 = A . B Y4 = A . B Y = A B + AB
0 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 1 1
1 0 1 1 1
1 1 0 0 0

EVERGREEN
SERIES
PART-I
Answer 1.
(A) (i) (c) Outward electric flux will remain the same because the enclosed charge remains the same.
(ii) (c) When the polarity is reversed
V =64=2V 4V
X Y
and total resistance in the circuit = 8 + 2 + 10 = 20
6 V, 2 8
2
Current in the circuit = = 0.1 A
20
p.d. across the 8 resistance = 8 0.1 = 0.8 V
Terminal potential difference will be = 4 + 0.8 = 4.8 V
eL
(iii) (c) We know m = (in magnitude)
2m
(iv) (b) Objective of the lens has greater aperture and greater focal length.
(v) (c) It is a postulate of the Bohrs model of hydrogen atom.
(B) (i) The lines of force are perpendicular to the surface of a charge conductor.
+++
+ +
+ +
+ +
+ +++ +
(ii) The required relation is

Ee Ve
vd = =
m ml
(iii) Nichrome, Constantan. They are all alloy. Nichrome is an alloy of nickel and chromium. Constantan
is an alloy copper and nickel.
(iv) It is not a drawback of the cell although it decreases the current drawn from the cell in a circuit. No,
it does not remain constant but changes with constant use of the cell.
(v) The nature of the force between them is magnetic. Each wire experiences a force because it is placed
in the magnetic field of the other. The force is attractive in the first case and repulsive in the other.
(vi) Two sources of light are said to be coherent, if they emit light of the same wavelength, constant phase
difference and preferably of the same amplitude.
(vii) Yes. Since = tan ip , ip depends upon , which further depends upon the colour of light.
(viii) The intensity of the distant image will decrease because a part of the objective will be blocked by
the bee.
(ix) It is because the radius of curvatures of the surface are equal. According to lens makers formula, the
focal length is infinity and power is zero.
(x) The deviation produced by a thin prism ( = ( 1)A) depends upon :
(a) angle of the prism.
(b) refractive index of the material of the prism.
(xi) The first spectral line of the Balmer series is produced when the transition of the electron takes place
from n = 3 to n = 2.
(xii) The required relation is
1
Tm =

(xiii) Spin.
(xiv) Cadmium or boron. These rods check the chain reaction from becoming violent by absorbing.
(xv) It is a method in which the signal is freely transmitted in space by using an antenna and is received at
the other end by intercepting the signal with the help of another antenna. e.g., Television broad,
microwaves etc.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
PART-II
SECTION - A
Answer 2.
(a) In the figure is shown an electric dipole formed by two equal
C +q
and opposite charges at the points A and B in a uniform electric qE
A

field of intensity E as shown :
Then the force acting on the charge q placed at A = qE in the p
E
direction of electric field.

Similarly, force acting on q charge at B = qE opposite to the B
qE
direction of the electric field. q
These two forces are equal and opposite and act at different points along parallel lines. The net force on
them is zero but they form a couple whose moments are
= Either force Arm of the couple
= qE BC
If is the angle between the direction of dipole moments and the electric field, then
BC
= sin
2a
BC = 2a sin
= qE 2a sin
= pE sin (_ p = q 2a)
The above relation may be written in the vector form as

= pE
(b) The electric potential energy between any two charges q1 and q2 is
1 q1q2
P. E. =
4 r
The potential energy of the system of charges shown in the fig.
1 qq 1 qq 1 qq 1 q2 1 q2 1 q2
P. E. = . . . . . + .
4 0 a 4 0 2a 4 0 2 a 4 0 a 4 0 a 4 0 a
+q a +q
1 q2 1 1
= . 1 1 1 + 1
4 0 a 2 2
2a
2a
1 2
= . q2 .
4 0 2 a a
2
2q
=
4 0 a
Answer 3. q q
a
(a) The capacity of a parallel plate capacitor with air as the dielectric is given by
A 0
C =
d
d/2
Let X and Y the distance in which air exists when the metal plate V2
is introduced as the dielectric for metal plate K =
+ V1 V3
If V is the potential difference between the plates of the
capacitor, then +
V = V1 + V2 + V3 +
= Ex + 0 + Ey [field inside a metallic conductor is zero] + x y

= E(x + y) +
+
d
V = E d
+
2
d

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Q d
V= Resistance box
A0 2
D (S)
2A 0
or Q = V
d Jockey G
A (P) (Q) C
Q 2A 0 B
or = l (100 )l
V d
+
2A 0
or C= Cell Rheostat K key
d
i.e., the capacity is doubled.
(b) The resistance of a conductor can be measured with the help of the slide wire bridge which is based on the
principle of Wheatstone Bridge. The labelled diagram is given below :
Answer 4.
(a) Here,power of the heating coil = 2000 W
Mass of water to be heated = 1 kg
Rise of temperature = 100 4 = 96C
= 80%, t = ?
Heat required to raise the temperature of 1000 g of water through 96C = 1000 96 4.2 J
Heat product in time t s = 2000 t joules
80
Heat used for heating water = 2000 t
100
80
2000 t = 1000 96 4.2
100
1000 96 4.2 100
t =
2000 80
= 2525
(b) The null-point method is always better because they are more accurate because it is easier and accurate to
locate the null-point than to read some deflection.
Very high and very low resistances cannot be determined by this method because when the resistances in
the four arms of the Wheatstone Bridge become highly different, the bridge loses its sensitivity and the
method losses accuracy.
Answer 5.
(a) In the figure is shown a regular hexagon by connecting six wires and the corners are also joined to the
centre of the hexagon as shown. The distribution of current is as shown. If E is the emf of the cell, then the
effective resistance between A and D is
E B r C
Req = ... (i) I2
2I + I1 I I2 I
I
Applying Kirchhoffs second law to the mesh AODGA 2I + I1 I1 I I2
I1 + I1r = E A O I1 D
(I I)2
or 2I1r = E I I I2 I
E F I E
I1 = ... (ii)
2r
Again, applying second law to the mesh OEFO 2I + I1 G
(I I2)r I2r + (I I2)r = 0
or 2Ir 3I2r = 0
2I = 3I2
2I
or I2 = ... (iii)
3
Applying second law to the mesh ABCDGA
Ir + I2r + Ir = E
2Ir + I2r = E ... (iv)

EVERGREEN
SERIES
2I
Putting the value of I2 = from (iii) into (iv), we have
3
2I
2Ir + r =E
3
8Ir
=E
3
3E
I = ... (v)
8r
Putting the value of I1 from (ii) and (v) into (i), we have
E 4
Req = = r
3E E 5
2 +
8r 2r
(b) The field lines of an external magnetic field near a (i) diamagentic substance (ii) paramagentic substance are
as shown in the fig.
X Y
Diamagnetic Paramagnetic
Answer 6.
(a) Radius of the wire = a
Area of cross-section of the wire = a2
I I
Current density J = = 2
A a
It is required to find the magnetic field due to this wire at a point P when the point P be inside the wire and
outside the wire.
Case 1. When the point P is inside the wire, the current responsible for producing the magnetic field in the
circuit enclosed by a circular cross-section of radius r. Let I be the current, then
I = J r2
I
= . r 2
a 2
r2
=I
a2 P
r
Now, we know that the magnetic field due to a long straight current
at a distance r from the axis is.
0 2I a
B = .
4 r 2
0 2 Ir 2
= . .
4 r a 2
0I
B = r
2 a 2
Case 2. When the point P lies outside the conductor, the whole of the current carried by the conductor is
effective.
0 2I
B = .
4 r
0 I
B =
2 r

EVERGREEN
SERIES
(b) Time constant is the time in which the current through an inductor grows to 63.8% of its maximum current. If
the time constant is large, it implies that the rate of growth of current is slow and hence the induced emf is
less. If the time constant is less, the rate of growth or decay of current is very large and hence the induced
emf is large. Since the break is very sudden, the induced emf will be much larger than the induced emf at
break which is usually slow.
Answer 7.
(a) Here, R = 100 , Ea = 200 V,
= 300 rad s1
When the capacitance is removed, the circuit becomes LR circuit, then
L
tan =
R
L XL
tan 60 = =
R R
XL = L = R 3 = 100 3 ... (i)
Similarly, when only inductance is removed, it becomes a CR circuit.
XC
In this tan =
R
XC
3 =
100
XC = 100 3
When the circuit is LCR
Z = (X L XC )2 + R 2 = R (_ XL = XC)
EV 200
IV = = = 2A
R 100
The circuit is now resistive.
Power consumed by the LCR circuit
E2V 200 200

= = = 400 W
R 100
(b) An ideal inductor i.e., an inductor without any resistance consumes no power because of its power factor.

The angle by which the current lag behind the voltage by .
2

Now, power factor K = cos = 0
2
No power is consumed although both V and I are non-zero.
SECTION-B
Answer 8.
(a) Wavefront : When we drop a stone on the surface a disturbance travels outward from that point. Similarly,
from a point souce of light, a disturbance travels outward and sets the particles of the medium into vibration.
As the disturbance travels forward it sets more and more particles of the medium into vibration. Wavefront in
a medium is the locus of all points in the medium vibrating in the same phase. The shape of the wavefront
depends upon the shape of the source from which the disturbance originated.
If the source is a point
source the shape of the
wavefront will be
spherical. As the
disturbance travels Rays
forward the radius of
curvature of a spherical Source
wavefront goes on
increasing but its A line source
curvature goes on
Wavefronts of different shapes Plane wavefront Cylindrical wavefront
decreasing. At a far off

EVERGREEN
SERIES
point from the source, a small part of the wavefront may be taken to be a plane. In the case of a line source,
the wavefront will be cylindrical.
Ray : A ray of light is the direction in which the wave travels. It is perpendicular to the wavefront at any
point. If the waves of light travel in only one direction, the wavefronts will be plane.
(b) The two wavefronts from the same wave cannot cross each other, because otherwise at the point of intersection
there will be two directions of propagation of light at that point which is not possible.
Answer 9.
(a) Here, d = 0.54 mm = 5 104 m
D = 1.0 m
x = 8.835 103 m
n =9
th
Distance of the 9 bright fringe from the central maxima is
D
x9 = 9 ... (i)
d
and distance of second dark fringe from the central maxima
D
x n = (2n 1)
2 d
x2 = 3 . D
2 d
It is given that
xn x2 = 8.835 103
D 3 D
9 = 8.835 103
d 2 d
D
15 = 8.835 103
2 d
8.835 103 2 0.5 103 m

=
1 15
= 0.589 106 m
= 5890
(b) Here, a = 1.0 nm = 1000 109 m, = 500 109 m
If is the half angular width
a sin =

sin =
a
500 109
=
1000 109
1
sin =
2
= 30
Answer 10.
(a) Here, the image I formed by the convex lens serves as an object for the concave lens giving rise to a real
image at I.
For the concave lens u = 10 cm
v = 30 cm
f =?
1 1 1
Now, =
v u f
1 1 1
=
30 10 f

EVERGREEN
SERIES
1 1 3 2
= =
f 30 30
30
f= = 15 cm
2
(b) When a ray of white light is incident on a prism, it is split A
up into its constituent colours. It is known as dispersion.

As shown the violet colour is deviated the most and the R
red colour the least. The angle between the extreme colours
i.e., violet and the red colours in the spectrum is called
angular dispersion. If v is the deviation of the violet colour ht
lig
hite
and r, the deviation in the red colour, then W
Angular dispersion = v r R
B C
It is shown in the fig. Prism V
Answer 11.
(a) The ray diagram by which the image of a distant object is formed in an Astronomical telescope is as shown in
the fig. alongside :
The objective lens which is of larger aperature and larger focal D
length form the image of the distant object. A parallel beam of
u
light falling on the objective is focussed by it at AB which B2 B1
is the image of AB. The image is reduced in size. The position O1

O2
of the eye lens which is also a convex lens of comparatively A1
smaller focal length and smaller aperture is adjusted so that
the image AB is within the focus of the eye lens. Its position Objective A2 Eyepiece
is so adjusted that the final image is formed at the least
distance of distinct vision. The final image is inverted with respect to the object.
Magnifying power of a telescope is defined as the ratio of the angle subtended by the final image formed at
the distance of distinct vision to the angle subtended by the object at infinity.

M =

Since angles are small
tan
M =
tan
A1B1
Now, tan =
B1O2
A1B1
and tan =
B1O1
A1B1 B1O1
M =
B1O2 A1B2
B1O1 f 0
= = ... (i)
B1O2 u
where B1O2 is the value of u for which the image is formed at the least distance of distinct vision.
Now, for the eyepiece
f = fe
v =D
u =?
1 1 1
Now, =
v u fe
1 1 1 D + fe
= + =
u f e D fe D
Df e
u =
D + fe

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Putting this value of u in above, we get
f0
M = [D + f e ]
Df e
f0 fe
M =
f0 1 + D
f0
(b) Angular magnification =
fe
Answer 12.
(a) P = 40 W, = 2480 , r = 2.0 m, w0 = 3.68 eV
Energy of each photon
hc
Ep =

6.62 1034 3 108
= J
2480 1010
6.62 3
= 1017
248
662 3
= 1019 J
248
= 8.0 1019 J
= 5.00 eV
Energy emitted by the 40 W lamp/sec. = 40 J
If N is the number of photons emitted per sec.
N Ep = 40
40
N = = 5 1019
8 1019
Number of photon incident on the Mg surface per unit areas
N
=
4 r 2
5 109
=
4 3.14 2 2
50
= 1019
4 3.14 4
= 1019 photon
K.E. of the fastest electron :
Energy of the photoelectron = 5.0 3.68
= 1.32 eV
EK = 1.32 1.6 1019 J
1
EK = mv 2
2
2EK 2 1.32 1.6 1019

v = =
m 9 1031
= 0.685 106 ms1
= 6.85 105 m1
Threshold wavelengeth i.e., maximum wavelength for which photoelectric effect takes place,
hc
w0 =


EVERGREEN
SERIES
hc 6.62 1034 3 108

= =
w0 3.68 1019
6.62 3
= 107
3.68
6.62 3 1000
=
3.68
= 5397
(b) We know that
h h h
= = = , where V is the accelerating potential.
p 2mK 2m QV
If p and are the de-Broglie wavelengths, then
h
p =
2m pQ p V
h
=
2m Q V
p m Q
=
mpQ p
4 2
= . =2 2
1 1
Answer 13.
(a) Here, accelerating voltage V = 20000 V
min = ?
hc
Now eV =
min
hc 6.62 1034 3 108

min = = m
eV 1.6 1019 20000
6.62 3
= 1011 m
1.6 2
6.62 3
= 1011 1012 picometre
1.6 2
6.62 3 10
= = 62.06 pm
1.6 2
(b) Mass of 56 =
26 Fe 55.934939 amu
Mass 26 of neutron = 1.008665 amu
Mass of proton = 1.007825 amu
Total mass of the constituents of the nucleon= 26 1.007825 + 30 1.008665 amu
= 26.20345 + 30.25995
= 56.4634 amu
Mass defect m = 56.4634 55.934939 amu
= 0.528461 amu
Energy equivalent of this mass defect = 0.528461 931.5 MeV
= 492.26 MeV
492.26
Binding energy per nucleon = = 8.79 MeV
56

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Answer 14.
Here, T = 4.5 109 years
0.693
= yr1
4.5 109
0.693
= S1
4.5 10 365 24 60 60 9
Number of atom in 1 g of a sample of U238

6.023 1023
N = 1
238
dN
Now, activity = N
dt
0.693 6.023 1023

=
4.5 109 365 24 60 60 238
4
= 1.236 10 disintegration/sec.
Answer 15.
The circuit diagram for an n-p-n transistor in common emitter configuration :
IC mA
C +
+ A IB +
n-p-n Rh
+ B VCE VCC
+ E
VBB VBE I
E
Rh
The input graph is a graph between the base current IB and the base to emitter voltage at constant collector
voltage. The shape of the graph is as below. The graphs have been drawn at two different voltages.
IB
(VCE ) (VCE )
1 2
Base current (in A)
VBE
0
Base emitter voltage
(b) The Boolean expression for the given set of logic gates is Y = A.B+ A B
AND gate
A
B Y
A
B OR gate
AB

EVERGREEN
SERIES
The truth table is as shown in the fig.
A B A B A.B AB Y = A.B+ A. B
0 0 1 1 0 0 0
0 1 1 0 1 0 1
1 0 0 1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0 0 0 0
It is the truth table of a XOR gate :
A B A B A.B AB
0 0 1 1 0 0
0 1 1 0 1 0
1 0 0 1 0 1
1 1 0 0 0 0

EVERGREEN
SERIES

PART-I
Answer 1.
V 0
(A) (i) (a) E = = = 0. Potential is constant, hence dV = 0.
r R
(ii) (c) Secondary cell will provide more current as its internal resistance is less.
(iii) (d)
(iv) (a) Microwaves have shorter wavelength than radiowaves. Hence, they scatter less than radiowaves and
penetrate more in the atmosphere.
(v) (a) Diffraction of light occurs from the objects having dimension one micron (1 ), which are not very
common. Diffraction of sound occurs from the objects having dimension 1 to 2 m (e.g., windows and
doors in a room) which are very common.
(B) (i) A tube light of 40 watt is better source of light as it gives more luminous flux for same radiant flux.
1.22
(ii) = . For blue colour A is least (among visible rays only), limit of resolution would be least and small
d
objects will be most distinct.
(iii) Their work function is relatively lower than the other metals.
(iv) Thermal neutrons are slow neutrons having speed 2.2 kms1.
(v) When two equally thick p and n type semiconductors are joined, nearly 5% free electron from n-type cross
towards p-type and neutralise the holes in the p-type. The neutral layer in the middle of the p-n junction is
called depletion layer.
(vi) No, as the charge lies only on the outer surface of the conductor.
(vii) Temperature coefficient of resistance, x is almost zero for constantan, hence the resistance of the conductor
does not change with temperature.
(viii) Aluminium is a light metal, therefore, a coil wound on aluminium frame will require less torque to deflect.
(ix) Direction of induced current is such that it always opposes the cause which generates the current.
(x) Energy loss at the point of dark fringe redistributes its energy to the point of bright fringe.
Linear light
(xi) source (slot)
Cylindrical wavefront
(xii) There will be no change in the size and position of image but the intensity of image will decrease.
(xiii) Photons are the energy particles and do not carry any charge to get deflected in electric and magnetic fields.
(xiv) Specific charge is the ratio of electronic charge to mass for any charge particle, e/m for electron is
1.76 1011 coulomb kg1.
(xv) Time in which any radioactive substance decays half to its original mass is called half-life.
1 1 1
1g g g g and so on.
T1/ 2 2 T1/ 2 4 T1/ 2 8
PART-II
SECTION-A
Answer 2.
(a) Place test charge q0 at the centre of the circle O. A +q
Intensity at point O due to +q charge at A,
1 q r
EA = AO
4 0 r 2 O
+q0
1 q +q +q
Similarly, EB = 4 2 BO B C
0 r

EVERGREEN
SERIES
1 q
and EC = CO .
4 0 r 2

From law of parallelogram, Since E A = E B (numerically) and the angle between the two is 120, resultant

of the two will be equal and opposite to EC . Therefore, the net intensity at O is equal to zero.
(b) To find intensity due to an infinite plane sheet of charge :
A thin infinitely large plane sheet has charge density (charge per unit area)
on both sides of the sheet. To find intensity at point P at distance r from
the sheet, consider a cylinder of cross-section area dS through the point P. n
S
Two caps of this cylinder are S and S and flux through each cap is E.dS. dS
Q EP E
Consider any other point Q on the curved surface of cylinder, where S
field and outward normal to surface are at 90, therefore, the flux = EdS
cos 90 = 0. Hence, total flux through the cylinder = E.S + E.S + 0 = 2 E.S.
Total charge on the surface of the sheet enclosed by the cylinder = dS.
1
Applying Gausss law, 2 E.S = (S).
d + +
+ + +
or E = 2 0 ++ +
+q + + +q
q +
++ +
0
For a small area A if the charge is q, then charge density = E
A + + P
q +
+ +
and intensity at any point P, EP =
2A 0
. ++
Answer 3. A = area
(a) Resistance R l2 (if volume is constant)
R1 l12
=
R2 l22
2
4 l 1
= 3 =
R2 3l 9
R2 = 9 4 = 36 ohm.
There will be no change in specific resistance of wire.
b
(b) The adjacent figure shows the circuit diagram of a Wheatstone Bridge. I1
P Q
When bridge is balanced, Vb = Vd , and no current flows through I1
galvanometer. Current I1 flows through abc and current I2 through adc. a c
G
I2
From Ohms law Va Vb = I1 P and Vb Vc = I1 Q
R S
Va Vb P I2
= + d
Dividing, Vb Vc Q ...(i)
Cell
Also, Va Vb = I2 R and Vb Vc = I2 S
Va Vd R
Dividing, = ...(ii)
Vd Vc S
But Vb = Vd
Va Vb R
Vb Vc = S ...(iii)
From equations (i) and (iii), we have
P R
= . This is required formula.
Q S
Answer 4.
(a) E = 1.2 volt, V = 1.15 volt, R = 2 ohm
EV 1.21.15 0.052 0.1

Internal resistance, r = R= 2 = = = 0.087 ohm.
V 1.15 1.15 1.15

EVERGREEN
SERIES
(b) The main part of tangent galvanometer is a vertical copper wire coil of 2 or 50 or P(Coil)
500 turns wound on a wooden frame. A deflection magnetometer is fixed at the
centre of the coil. The coil can rotate in vertical plane. Tangent galvanometer works
on the principle of tangent law
.2.50.500
F = H tan . ...(i)
The plane of the circular coil is rotated till it comes along north-south. When current Magnetometer
Box
flows in the coil, magnetic field induces at the centre of coil along east or west
depending on the direction of current in the coil. Magnetic field due to coil, H
T.G.
Coil N
2 nI
F= 0 ...(ii)
4 r
S
From equations (i) and (ii), we have
F
0 2 nI
= H tan T.G.
4 r
4 rH 2rH
or I = tan = tan

0 2 n 0n A Rh
+
2rH
I = K tan , where K = = reduction factor.
0n
Answer 5.
(a) For tan B position, bench of magnetometer is kept along north-south position. First magnetometer box is put in
the cavity in the middle and is rotated till 90o-90 of the circular scale align with the central line of the meter
scale. Now, the bench is rotated, without disturbing the box till the pointer reads 0-0 in the circular scale.
(b) When coil of the motor rotates in the magnetic field, magnetic flux changes through the coil. A current induces
in the coil opposite to the direction of main current (Lenzs law) and is called back current, emf of this coil is
called back emf. If the emf applied from battery is E, back emf is e and the resistance of coil is R, then current
in the coil
Ee
I = (Ohms law)
R
E e = IR
Multiplying the equation by I t, we have,
EIt eIt = I2 Rt
EIt = eIt + I2Rt
Energy supplied = useful energy + energy loss.
useful energy eIt e
Now, efficiency n = energysupplied = =
EIt E
or e as emf of the battery E is constant.
Answer 6.
(a) A choke coil is thick copper wire coil wounded on a soft iron core. It has very high inductive reactance
(XL = very high) and negligible ohmic resistance (R = 0).
X L L
Since, tan = = = infinity.
R 0
or = 90
or power factor, cos = 0.
Hence, a choke coil can produce wattless current. It is used as starter in the tube lights where it provides
very high starting potential (nearly 550 volt) without consuming much power.
1 2
Energy consumed by a choke coil, E = LI .
2
(b) At 463 C. this material will all of a sudden get converted from ferromagnetic to paramagnetic.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Answer 7.
(a) Magnetic susceptibility of soft iron is maximum. It increases the magnetic strength of electromagnet manifolds.
(b) Since, the total length of the coil is constant, when number of turns will increase from n to 3n. Radius of the
coil will decrease from r to r/3. Now,
2nI
B = 107
r
n
or B
r
B1 n/r 1
or = =
B2 3n / (r / 3) 9

B2 = 9 B1 .
Hence, the field will increase 9 times.

SECTION-B
Answer 8.
(a) Youngs double slit experiment proves the wave nature of the light. S is a monochromatic light source placed
in front of a narrow slit S1, S2 and S3 are two other slits such that distance S1S2 = S1S3. According to theory
of rectilinear propagation of light, two images of slits at X and Y should appear but when viewed on the
screen, consecutive dark and bright strips of the equal thickness are obtained. These strips are called dark
and the bright fringes respectively. Young explained the formation of these fringes on the basis of the wave
theory. Slit S1 behaves as a point source and produces spherical wavefronts. When such a wavefront falls on
the slits S2 and S3, each slit behaves as an independent light source and produces identical spherical
wavefronts.
Dark
fringe
Bright
fringe
X and Y
S2 are the
S1
imaginary
points of
S S3 illumination
Slit S1
Slits
S2 and S3
Screen Actual fringe formation
on the screen
(a) (b)
L M N
+B1
+D1
S1
O
S2
D1
B1
Slit Slit Screen

(c)
(b) At polarisation incidence, reflected and refracted rays are at right angle to each other.
= tan ip
1.5 = tan ip
ip = tan1(1.5) = 56.3

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Answer 9.
f1 1 0.02
(a) For achromatic combination, f = = 0.03
2 2
2
or f1 = f 2 ...(i)
3
Also, for combined lens
1 1 1
= f + f
F 1 2
1 3 1
= +
50 2 f 2 f2
1 3 1
From equation (i), = +
50 2 f 2 f2
1 1

2 f 2 = 50
f2 = 25 cm
2
f1 =
(25) = + 16.6 cm
3
Hence, a convex lens of focal length 16.6 cm and a concave lens of focal length 25 cm are to be used.
1.22
(b) Limit of resolution, =
d
1.22 6000 1010
= = 6 107 radian
1.22
Answer 10.
(a) The given figure shows the ray diagram of a compound microscope.
Le
Ve
LO VO
K A Eye
B
FO
B B FO FO o Fe
uo
A
ve = D
A
Angular manification of this microscope,
Visual angle by the finalimage at O tan
M = = =
visual angle by the object at O tan
A"B"
= OB"
AB
OB"
A" B" A"B" A' B'
= = . = me m0
AB A' B' A' B'
v v
= e 0 ... (i)
ue u0

EVERGREEN
SERIES
1 1 1
Now, for eyepiece lens, =
fe ve ue
1 1 1
or = f +v ...(ii)
ue e e
v v
From equations (i) and (ii), M = 0 1 + e
u0 fe
For least distance of distinct vision, ve = D
v D
M = 0 1 +
u0 fe
(b) First set the eyepiece for parallel rays by focussing it to any distant source. Make a sharp and bright image
of white illuminating slit on the eyepiece by focussing and adjusting the collimator. Place prism on prism
table and view the spectrum through eyepiece. Rotate prism table till the shifting of spectrum in the same
direction stops for a moment and then moves backward. This is the position of minimum deviation.
Answer 11.
Real depth .
(a) Refractive index, n=
Apparent depth
x
1.5 = , where x is the thickness of slab.
x 0.4
1.5x 0.6 = x
0.5x = 0.6
6
x= = 1.2 cm.
5
(b) Let a thin lens of refractive index n be made of two spherical surfaces LOL and LOL of radii R1 and R2
respectively. A is an object, after refraction from the surface LOL, the image of A forms at B. Hence, for
LOL surface
L
A O O v C B
R2
R1
u
v
L
n 1 n 1
= ...(i)
v u R1
For spherical surface LOL, B is object and C is image. Light is moving from glass to air,
1/ n 1 1/ n 1 1
= as gna =
v v R2 a ng
1 1 1 n
or = ....(ii)
v u R2
Adding equations (i) and (ii),
1 1 n 1 1 n
= +
v u R1 R2
1 1 1
or = (n 1) R R .
f 1 2
This is the required formula.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
SECTION-C
Answer 12.
(a) Cathode rays are emitted from the cathode of the discharge tube at very low pressure and high potential
difference.
Properties :
(i) These rays exert mechanical pressure.
(ii) These rays can cause ionisation of other gas molecules.
(b) Lenards law
(i) Saturation current by pholoelectrons is proportional to intensity of incident light, Is I.
(ii) If the frequency of incident radiation is less than threshold frequency, there will be no emission whatsoever
be the intensity of light.
Einsteins explanation for photoelectric effect explains these laws.
When intensity of light increases, number of incident photons also increase. Since, each photon can emit
one electron, number of photoelectrons increases. This increases the saturation pholocurrent.
1
In the equation h ( 0) = mv2, if is less than 0, kinetic energy of photoelectrons becomes negative
2
and these electrons cannot come to surface. Hence, no emission is possible. Increasing the intensity in this
situation simply increases the number of photons of same frequency.
Answer 13.
(a) Lorentz force on electron in a uniform magnetic field is balanced by centripetal force. Hence,
mv 2
evB =
r
e v 107
= = = 4 109 coulombkg1.
m r B 0.25 10 2
(b) In -particle scattering experiment, highly energetic -particles are
allowed to fall on a thin gold foil. Following observations are
Energetic
made :
- particles
(i) Most of the -particles crossed the foil, without any difficulty.
(+ Ze)
(ii) Some -particles (1 in 1000) deviated from their path. Their
deviation was more towards a fixed point.
(iii) Very few -particules (1 in 10000) retraced the path. These
particles were closest to the fixed point.
Gold foil
Following are the conclusions drawn from the observations :
(i) Positive charge of the atom is not uniformly distributed all over the atom.
(ii) It is concentrated at the centre of atom in a very small space known as nucleus.
(iii) There is vacuum between the nucleus and the atom.
(iv) Electrons revolve round the nucleus in circular orbits.
Answer 14.
13.6
(a) Energy of nth level, En = eV
n2
13.6
for n = 1 E1 = = 13.6 eV
1
13.6
for n = 4 E4 = = 0.85 e V
16
E = E4 E1 = 0.85 + 13.6 = 12.75eV.
12375 12375
Wavelength of photon, = = = 970.6
E 12.75
(b) In any nucleus, total mass of all nucleons is always more than the mass of the nucleus. This difference in
mass is called mass defect. It converts to energy (E = mc2) known as binding energy and bind nuclear particles
within the nucleus.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Answer 15.
(a) In any atom, eletrons are found in definite energy states. Energy states of sodium (Na) atom, for example,
are 1s12s22p63s1. In an isolated atom, these energy levels are well defined but in a solid where atoms are
closely packed, the higher energy states like 3s1 splits into number of energy levels. These energy levels
form valence band. Similarly, completely vacant energy levels like 3p etc., also split into number of energy
levels and form conduction band. In insulators, the energy gap between valence and conduction band is very
high and the electron cannot jump from valance to conduction band.
In semiconductors, the gap is small and electrons can jump from conduction to valence band. In good
conductors, the two bands overlap and there is no problem for free electrons to move from valence to
conduction band.
Empty level
Conduction
3p C.B. C.B. C.B.
band
e E
3s
Vacancy Valence
of 1e band E E E <0
Good conductor
2p Semiconductor
Insulator
2s
V.B. V.B. V.B.
1s
Energy states Energy states Insulator Semi- Good
of isolated atom in solids Conductor Conductor
(b) Fission of 92U235 releases 3 neutrons. Each neutron in turn can bombard three 92U235 nuclei and can release
9 neutrons and so on. This process increases in the order 1, 3, 9, 27, 81,..., etc. This is called chain reaction.
It is of two types:
(i) Controlled chain reaction : Nuclear reactor.
(ii) Uncontrolled chain reaction : Atomic bomb.

EVERGREEN
SERIES

PART-I
Answer 1.
(A) (i) (a) Power = I2 R
P 80
I2 = = = 0.2 or I = 0.45 amp.
R 400
(ii) (b) Force on charged particle,
F = qvB
= 1.6 1019 4 107 2.0 = 2.0 = 1.28 1011 newton.
(iii) (a)
(iv) (b) The pin is at the focus of the lens. The light rays after refraction from the lens become parallel and fall
normally on the plane mirror. The rays thus retrace their path. Hence, focal length of the lens is 20 cm.
f0
(v) (b) For relaxed eye, M= f
e
f0
9= f
e
f0 = 9 fe
Also, L = f0 + fe ; 200 = f0 + fe ; solving we have, f0 =180 cm; fe = 20 cm.
(B) (i) In white light source, central fringe appears white and the rest of the fringes appear coloured.
1 1
(ii) sin C = = = 0.67 or C = 42
g 1.5
(iii) Yes, the wavelength of violet is less than that of yellow rays. Hence, the energy of the violet is more than
that of red rays.
(iv) Moderator slows the speed of fast moving neutrons. Heavy water is one such moderator.
(v) A B Y Y
0 0 0 1
0 1 0 1
1 0 0 1
1 1 1 0
Y = A.B
(vi) Energy = q V = (2e) V = 2 1.6 1019 10000 = 3.2 1015 joule.

(vii) Yellow, green, red and gold

2
4 5 10 5%
= 4.5 102 ohm with 5% tolerance.
C 27
(viii) Dielectric constant, K= = = 5.4.
C 5
(ix) In resonance, XL = XC and Z = R = 60 ohms.
(x) Marginal Rays
Paraxial Rays Fm Fp
Spherical aberration

EVERGREEN
SERIES
(xi) An optical fibre works on the principle of total internal reflection. It is made of two coaxial, cylindrical,
transparent media of different refractive indices. The refrative index of central transparent medium is more than
that of surrounding transport medium. When a light ray incidents through the central part, suffers total
reflection at the interface of the two media. Muliple reflections of the ray carry it to the other end of the fibre.
Transparent substance
of lesser refractive
index
Transmitted
ray
Incident ray
Transparent substance
of higher refractive
index

(xii) For single slit diffraction, sin =
a
5 10 7
or sin = = 0.5
10 6
or = 30
h
(xiii) Wavelength of an electron wave, =
p
h 6.6 1034
or p = = = 5.5 1024 kgms 1
1.2 1010
15 1
(xiv) Amount at present = 1 =
16 16
N n
1
Now, N =
2
0
n
1 1
=
16 2
4 n
1 1
=
2
2
40
Therefore, n = 4 and half-life = = 10 days.
4
(xv) No, practically both p-type and n-type semiconductors are developed on opposite face of same germanium
crystal.
Part-II
SECTION-A
Answer 2.
(a) Assume the square as one face of the cube of edge 10 cm. Clearly, the point charge is at the centre of this cube.
q
Total electric flux through this cube = +10 C
o 5 cm
10 10 6
=
8.86 1012
= 1.12 106 Vm
11.2 105
Hence, electric flux from one face = = 1.8 105 Vm.
6
10 cm

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Also, from Gausss law, electric flux = E.dS

1.12106
or E= = =1.12 108 Vm1
dS (10 10)10 4
(b) Let us consider two parallel plates as shown in the figure below. Positive charge q is given to the first plate
and outer surface of the second plate is connected to earth. This arrangement is called parallel plate capacitor.
Let area of each plate be A and separation between the plates be d. Consider a point P in between the plates.
q
Electric field at point P, E = A
0
Potential between the plates
A=area
q
V = E d = .d P
0 A
+q qo Earth
q q 0 A
Hence, Capacity C = = qd/ A = d
V 0
0 A
C =
d d
1
Note : Capacity of a parallel plate capacitor C A and C
d
Answer 3.
(a) From Ohms law, V = RI
l l
V = I as R =
A A
V I
=
l A
V I
E = .J as E = and J =
l A

E 1
J = = E. as =

(b) Principle : The potentiometer is a device used to measure
Battery
potential difference accurately. If we use any pointer type
instrument say a voltmeter, to measure p.d., there will be atleast
one percent error. But precise and accurate measurements are A
possible with a potentiometer. The principle of working lies in Key

the balancing of one voltage against another in parallel with it.
+ J
This figure shows the experimental set-up to obtain internal Cell
-
resistance of a cell of emf E. A resistance box (R.B.) is R.B. B
connected in parallel to the cell. First, infinite resistance is drawn
G
from the cell Jockey is moved from point A to point B of the
long resistance wire. Let distance of null point from A be l1.
Then emf of the cell.
E = l1 ...(i)
Now, a known resistance is drawn from the resistance box say R.
Let the distance of null point from point A be l2. The potential difference
V = l2 ...(ii)
From equations (i) and (ii),
E l1
= l
V 2
V + Ir l1 r l1
= l or 1+ = l
V 2 R 2
l
or r = 1 1 R . This is the required formula.
l2

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Answer 4.
(a) Let the pole strength and length of the bar magnet be m and m m
l respectively. Magnetic moment of the magnet M = m l. N S m N S m
Now, this bar converts to a semicircular magnet. I 2r
l
Hence, l = r or r = .

New magnetic moment of the magnet,
l
M = m 2r = 2m

2ml 2M
= =

b c
(b) Let a rectangular coil abcd has length l and width w. The current in the coil is

I and it is placed in magnetic field of intensity B . w

The force on the portions bc and da of the coil, F = 0 (parallel to B ).
B
The force on the portions ab and cd of the coil, F = IlB sin 90 l
= IlB.
Direction of force from Flemings left hand rule on these two portions is a d
opposite. If the plane of the coil is at angle , the torque on the coil, I
b F
= force perpendicular distance
= F (distance be) w
= F (c sin )
= (BIl) (w sin )

= BIA sin (as l w = A = area of coil) F c e
For the coil of n turns,

Torque, = BIAn sin
Answer 5.
(a) Axis of
rotation
Armature Current from C2 coil

C2
Resulting d.c.
e
Field
N S magnet
B
Slip rings C1
o
= t
R Current from C1 coil
When coil of the motor rotates between the poles of field magnet, magnetic flux changes through coil. From
Lenzs law, flux variation causes a current in the coil opposite to direction of main current. This is called
back current. If the emf of the external source be E and induced back emf is e, then net current in the motor
Ee
I = , R is resistance of the coil
R
E e = IR
EIt eIt = I2 Rt (multiplying by t)
Here, EIt is the energy supplied from the battery, I2Rt is heat loss and eIt is the electrical energy converted to
mechanical energy.
work output
Efficiency of the motor, = 100
work input

EVERGREEN
SERIES
eIt
= 100
EIt
e
= 100
E
Hence, efficiency of d.c. motor depends on the back emf of the motor.
(b) Paramagnetism is due to the revolving motion of electron round the nucleus while diamagnetism is due to
spin of electron on its axis.
B1 B1
i
1/2 1/2
e
B +1/2 +1/2
N
B2 B2
B1= 2 B2 > B1
In any atom, electrons revolve round the nucleus in circular orbits. The orbit behaves as a current carrying
coil and induces a tiny magnetic field at the centre of atom. Thus, each atom has its magnetic dipole moments.
In a paramagnetic substance, when the substance is put in strong magnetic field, some of its atoms change
their orientation to align their magnetic moment in the direction of external field. This induces a feeble
magnetic field in the direction of external field. On the other hand, atoms in diamagnetic substances have
paired electrons in their outermost orbit. These electrons have all quantum number same except opposite
spin. In normal atom, magnetic fields due to these two spinning electrons are equal and opposite and cancel
the effect of each other. When this substance is put in a strong external field, electron spinning in (lie direction
of external field slows in motion and intensity of its field reduces). While the electron spinning opposite to
external field accelerates and intensity of its field increases. Thus, a net field induces in opposite direction.
Answer 6.
1 1 1/ C
(a) The frequency of a.c. in a parallel LC circuit is given by n = = .The frequency of an oscillating
2 LC 2 L
1 k 1
spring is given by n = . Comparing the two equations, we have k = and m = L.
2 m C
It means that oscillations in LC circuit can be compared with the oscillations of an ideal spring. However, the
amplitude of these oscillations keeps decreasing due to the energy loss in charging and discharging of the
capacitor. This phenomenon is called damping.

dl r
(b) Magnetic field B at a point is, dB = . 3
0
4 r
A O Time
Answer 7.
(a) In suspended type galvanometer, the coil cannot deflect due to inertia but starts vibrating due to low frequency
a.c.
3 108
(b) Frequency of the wave, n = = 106 Hz
300
1
Now, in resonance, n =
2 LC
1 1
or C = = 10 9 = 5.1 1012 farad or 5.1 pF.
2 12 3
4 (3.14) 10 5 10 197

EVERGREEN
SERIES
SECTION-B
Answer 8.
(a) An artificial satellite at the height 36000 km above the equator moving from west to east in equatorial plane
appears stationary from the earth. It is called geostationary satellite.
Geostationary orbit
(Clarkes orbit)
S1
A B
Earth
36000 km
S2 S3
Communication by
satellites
Geostationary satellites are very useful in communication. The radio signals being e.m. waves cannot travel
along the curved surface of the earth. Hence, it is difficult to convey the message from one part of earth to
another. A set of three geostationary satellites S1, S2 and S3 solves this problem. A radio signal received by
satellite S1 is either reflected by itself to another place on the earth or is transmitted to satellites S2 or S3 that in
turn reflects the signal to earth. Hence, every inch on the earth surface is communicable through these satellites.
(b) Coherent sources are two imaginary sources derived from a single monochromatic source. The interfering
waves from these two sources have same amplitude, velocity, wavelength and a constant path difference.
R1
Monochromatic
incident ray R2
a c
Thin glass sheet

b d
b, d are coherent sources

in transmitted system
T2
T1
Answer 9.
c 1
(a) From Snells law, = = or v = c sin C
v sin C
= 3 108 sin 44
= 3 108 0.695
= 2.084 108 m/s
(b) AB is object placed between the lens and its first focus F. AB is the upright, virtual enlarged image.
Let KOB = and AOB =
A
A
K
F
O B B
u
v=D
Eye

EVERGREEN
SERIES
visual angle byimage at O tan

Angular Magnification, M = = = tan
visual angle by object at O
A B / BO A B A B v D
M = = = = = ...(i)
KB / BO KB AB u u
1 1 1
For lens,
f = v u
1 1 1
or = + ...(ii)
u f v
1 D v D
M = v + = +1=1+ (as v = D)
f v f f
Answer 10.
(a) Let the focal length of each lens be f1 and f2 respectively. Focal length of the doublet,
1 1 1
+ =
f1 f 2 20
f1 1 0.003 3
Also, for achromatic combination, f = = =
2 2 0.004 4
Solving the two equations, we have f1 = + 5 cm and f2 = 6.7 cm.
x
(b) Let the separation between the dots be x and their distance from eye be l, then angle, =
l
1
Again, limit of resolution = i =
60
I
3.14 D1
= radian
60 180 x = 10 m
3
Eye
3.14 1 10 3
Now, = D2
60 180 l
60 180 10 3
or l = = 3.44 m.
3.14
Answer 11.
(a) Plane wavefronts from a distant sources fall on a refracting surface PA. AB is the last plane wavefront of the
incident wave I1, I2 in medium 1 and in medium 2, CD is the first complete wavefront of the wave R1R2.
Inc
ide
n tw I2
ave N1
fro
nt
I1 B
i i C
P r O
A
r
D
N2
R1
Re
fra
R2
cte
d
wa
vef
ron
t

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Now, i + N1 AB = 90 = N1AB + BAC

or BAC = i
Also r + N2CD = 90 = N2CD + DCA
or DCA = r
The time in which the incident wave travels from B to C in medium 1 and refracted wave travels from A to D in
medium 2 is same.
distance
time =
velocity
BC AD V1 BC
= or = ...(i)
V1 V2 V2 AD
BC
In ADC, sin i =
AC
AD
In ABC, sin r =
AC
BC sin i
or = sin r ...(ii)
AD
V1 sin i
V2 = sin r ...(iii)
V1
But refractive index of a medium, n = V
2
sin i
or n = sin r . This is law of refraction.
(b) When a polaroid is rotated through 360 in front of ordinary (unpolarised) light, there is no change in the
intensity of transmitted light. However, when it is rotated in front of plane polarised light, intensity of
transmitted light becomes minimum except on two occasions when = 0 or 180.
SECTION-C
Answer 12.
hc
(a) Work function, W =
0
hc
Threshold wavelength, 0 =
W
6.6 1034 3 108
=
21.610 19
= 6.188 107 m = 6188
hc
Energy of a photon =

6.6 10 34 3 108
=
4.510 7
= 4.4 1019 joule
4.4 10 19
=
1.610 19
= 2.8 eV.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Now, energy of photon = W + K.E. of e
2.8 = 2.0 + K.E. of e
or K.E. of e = 2.8 2 = 0.8 eV.
Stopping potential = 0.8 volt.
(b) (i) Thin gold foil gives more probability of single collision of -particle with Au nucleus.
(ii) Atomic number of gold is quite high and gold nucleus is able to scatter the -particles.
Answer 13.
(a) Binding energy per nucleon of iron (Atomic weight = 56) like substances is very high
(= 105 eV). Hence, it is practically impossible to break these nuclei.
Ca
8 4
He
B.E./Nucleon
Kr
7 Mg
B Ra
6
5
4 Li
3
3 H
2
2
1 H
0
50 100 150 200
Mass Number
(b) Mass of nuclear particles (like neutrons and protons) is measured in atomic mass unit. It is reciprocal of
Avogadros no. N.
1 1
1 amu = = = 1.66 1027 kg.
N 6.0231026
Answer 14.
(a) In hydrogen atom,
electric force between e and proton = centripetal force
1 ee mv 2
4 0 r 2 =
r
1 e2
or mv2 = ...(i)
4 0 r
nh
From Bohrs second postulate, mvr =
2
nh
or v = ...(ii)
2mr
2
nh 1 e2
m =
2mr 4 0 r
40 h2 2
or r = 2 2 .n
4 me
r = 0.51 n2
4 0 h 2
Where = constant = 5.1 1011 m.
4 2 me 2
(b) (i) Temperature 108C and (ii) pressure 2000 atm.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Answer 15.
(a) Splitting of definite energy levels into numerous levels is called band. In an isolated atom, electrons are
found in definite energy levels. In solids where atoms are closeh packed higher energy levels split into various
levels to form valence and conduction bands.
Empty level
Conduction
3p C.B. C.B. C.B.
band
E
3s
Vacancy Valence
of 1e band
E E E< O
2p
Good conductor
Semiconductor
2s Insulator
V.B. V.B. V.B.
1s
Energy states Energy states Insulator Semi- Good
of isolated atom in solids Conductor Conductor
(b) The diagram shows a circuit for common emitter amplifier. Since, voltage gain and current gain both in a common
emitter amplifier are much higher, it controls the power loss (I2R) more effectively and behaves as a temperature
regulator in the circuit.
C
B
RL Output
E
Input
+ +
Be Be

EVERGREEN
SERIES

PART-I
Answer 1.
2e e 9 2 (1.6 10 19 )2
(A) (i) (c) Coulomb force, F = 9 109 = 9 10 = 17.6 N.
r2 (5.12 10 15 )2
1 1
(ii) (a) Heat produced = CV 2 = 6 10 6 (100)2 = 3 10 2 Joule.
2 2
V2 220220
(iii) (b) Resistance of heater, R = = = 121
P 400
121
Length of nichrome wire = = 11 m
11
(iv) (b)
emf
O Temperature
1 1 1
(v) (a) XC == = = 0.03
C 6
2 3.14 10 5 10 6 31.4
(B) (i) Maximum amplitude = 3a + a = 4a
Minimum amplitude = 3a a = 2a
Maximum intensity = (4a)2 = 16a2
Minimum intensity = (2a)2 = 4a2
(ii) L = f0 + fc
(iii) Minimum potential required to pass the diode current through a p-n diode.
(iv) Lesser the wavelength of X-ray, more is the penetrating power.
15
(v) Substance decays =
16
15 1
Substance remains = 1 =
16 16
N 4
1
Hence, =
N0 2
4
1 1
= or n = 4
16 2
Therefore, total time = 4 140 = 560 days.
(vi) When an electron (e) is accelerated to 1 V potential, its energy is called 1 eV.
1 eV = 1.6 1019 Joule.

1 p
(vii) V = .
4 0 r 2
(viii) The molecules of the insulating material break into electric dipoles. There is energy loss in this process.
(ix) If total current of the circuit is allowed to pass through the coil of ammeter, large amount of heat is produced
in the coil. This heat may burn the coil. To prevent this heating, a low resistance is used in parallel to the
coil. It allows most of the current through resistance and a very small amount, just sufficient to deflect the
coil, through the coil.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
dI dI
(x) e = L . If = 1; e = L. Hence, when 1 amp. sec1 current varies through this coil, emf induced is 1 volt.
dt dt
c
(xi) =
v
c 3 108
or v = =
1.5
= 2 108 ms1.
(xii) Colours in the soap bubble are due to interference of light.
Colours in the prism are due to diffraction of light.
(xiii) E = q.V = 1.6 1019 50 103
= 8 1015 joule.
(xiv) No. In absorption spectrum, atom absorbs energy from ground state only.
(xv) 12 g of C6 contains = 6.0 1023 atoms
6 14
14 g of C6 contains = 1023 = 7 1023 atoms.
12
PART-II
SECTION-A
Answer 2.
1 q1 q2
(a) F = .
40 r2
Fr 2 Nm 2
or k0 = =
q1 q2 C2
Sl
(b) R =
b h
S(l / 2) 2Sl
New resistance R = = = 2R
(b / 2)(h / 2) b h
New resistance is twice the original resistance.
Answer 3.

(a) Dipole moment p = 2.4 106 2.5 103 = 6.0 109 C

1 p 6 10 9
E = . 3 = 9 109
40 r (0.3)3
9 6 103
= = 2 103 Vm1
3 3 3
When dipole rotates by 90 it comes along end-on position.
New intensity, E = 2E = 2 2 103 = 4 103 Vm1
2NI
(b) Magnetic field at one end of solenoid, B = 0 .
4 l
Where 0 = Permeability of free space
N = No. of turns in solenoid
I = Current in solenoid
l = Length of solenoid
Answer 4.
(a) Sensitivity of a moving coil galvanometer depends on :
1. Torsional couple of suspension wire
2. Area of cross-section of coil
3. Number of turns in the coil
4. Strength of magnetic field between pole pieces.
0 qv 1.6 10 19 2.5 106
(b) B = . 2 = 107 = 1.6 101 = 0.16 N/Am
4 r (5 10 10 )2

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Answer 5.
(a) Kirchhoffs law :
1. The algebraic sum of the currents meeting at a point is zero. In a closed mesh, i.e., I = 0.
2. The algebraic sum of the products of the different resistors and the respective currents flowing them is
equal to the total emf acting in the circuit IR = E.
Let the currents from 3 V and 2 V cells be I1 and I2 respectively. I1 3V
A + B
In mesh ABCA, 4(I1 + I2) + 2I1 = 3
I2 I1 + I2 I1
6I1 + 4I2 = 3 ...(1)
In mesh ADCA, 4(I1 + I2) + 4I2 = 2 +
2V 4 2
4I1 + 8I2 = 2
2I1 + 4I2 = 1 ...(2)
Solving (1) and (2),
I1 = 0.5 amp. D C
and I2 = 0. 4 I2
Hence, current in 2 resistor is 0.5 amp.
(b) a.c. generator is a device, which converts mechanical energy to electrical energy. Diagram of a simple a.c.
generator is shown in figure. It has following parts :
(i) Armature, (ii) Field magnet, (iii) Slip rings, and (iv) Brushes. Axis of
rotation

When armature is rotated in the uniform magnetic field B
at constant angular speed , the magnetic flux through the coil Armature
changes continuously and a current is induced in the coil. Let

at any instant t, normal to the plane of the coil makes an angle
to the direction of B. Magnetic flux through the coil. N S
Field
magnet
= BAN cos , = t
B1 Slip
where, A = area of the coil and N is number of turns in the rings
coil. R1 B2
Since = /t or = t, we have = BAN cos t.
d
Differentiating the above expression, we have = BAN sin t. N
dt
d
From Faradays law, induced emf e = = BAN sin t. Since B
dt
magnetic field B, area A, number of turns N and angular velocity
are constant quantities, let e0 = BAN = peak emf induced in the
coil. Coil
Motion of coil in magnetic
field B
Answer 6.
(a) If in any LCR circuit, inductive reactance and the capacitive reactance become equal, i.e., XL = XC, the circuit
is called resonance. Clearly, in this condition impedance Zmin = XR = R and tan = 0 or = 0, i.e., the phase
difference between potential and current is zero. In a resonant circuit, since impedance of the circuit is minimum
E E
equal to ohmic resistance, the current in the circuit becomes maximum. Imax = v = v .
Z R
1 1 1 1 1
Since XL = XC, i.e., L = or 2 = or = or 2n = or n = .
C LC LC LC 2 LC
This frequency n is called resonant frequency of the circuit and is denoted by n0.
R3
Current Amplitude
L C
R3 < R2 < R1
R2
R1
no a.c.
O n
L and C Constant Tank circuit of radio receiver

EVERGREEN
SERIES
In a radio receivers tank circuit, an inductance coil L and a capacitor C are connected in series. When we
tune the receiver, we change the frequency of tank circuit by changing the value of C. No sooner this frequency
becomes equal to the frequency of any radio broadcasting programme, electrical resonance takes place and
that particular programme is received by the radio set.
(b) If the phase difference between potential and current, i.e., = 90, then cos = cos 90 = 0, i.e., power
factor is zero or the power of the circuit is zero. This current is called wattless current.
Answer 7.
(a) Here, A = 102 m2, d = 103 m, r = 6
0 r A 8.85 1012 6 102
Now, C = = F = 8.85 6 1011 F = 5.31 1010 F
d 103
(b) Given, H = 3 105 T and V = 3 105 T
V
If angle of dip is , then tan =
H
3 105
tan = =1
3 10 5
= 45
SECTION-B
Answer 8.
(a) PQR is a prism of a transparent material. Refracting angle of the prism is A. AB is any incident ray, BC is
refracted ray and ED is transmitted ray. Angle between the incident ray and transmitted ray is called angle of
deviation . The graph between angle of incidence and deviation angle is shown in figure. Least value of the
deviation angle is called angle of minimum deviation m.
P
1 2 2
N
1
A
N
F m
i1 i2 i1 i2
r1 r2 1 = 2
B E
A D For a given value of
C two values of i are i1 and
Q R
2 m , 1= 2
Fig. (a) Fig. (b)
From Fig. (a)
In PBCE, A + 90 + BCE + 90 = 360 or BCE = 180 A ...(i)
In BCE, r1 + r2 + BCE = 180...(ii)
From equation (i) and (ii), we have r1 + r2 = A.
Again, in BEF, (i1 r1) + (i2 r2) = or i1 + i2 = (r1 + r2) + or i1 + i2 = A + . Graph plotted between the
values of angle of incidence i and angle of deviation is shown in Fig. (b). For given value of , we have two
values of i1 and i2, but at = m ; i1 = i2 and also r1 = r2.
Therefore, r + r = A 2r = A r = A/2
Also, i + i = A + m 2i = A + m
A+ m
or i =
2
A + m
sin
sin i 2
From Snells law, refractive index n = ;n=
sin r sin A/2
Angular dispersion, Sm Smr = (nv nr)A.
v
(b) Given, f0 = 0.01 m, D = 0.25 m, fc = 0.05 m
Refraction through objective :
u = 11mm = 0.011 m
Using relation
1 1 1
=
v u f

EVERGREEN
SERIES
1 1 1 1 1
= + = +
v u f 0.011 0.01
v = 0.11 m
Magnification M is given by
v D
M =
u 1 + f
e
0.11 0.25
M = 0.011 1 + = 15
0.5
Answer 9.
(a) (i) Light should move from denser to rarer medium.
(ii) Angle of incidence should be more than critical angle.
(b) Let fv , fr and f be the focal length of the lens corresponding to violet, red and mean colour of light and
f v, f r and f the corresponding quantities for the second lens.
1 1 1
Then = ( 1)
f R 1 R 2
1 1 1
= f
R1 R 2 ( 1)
1 1 1 1
Then, = (v 1) R R = (v 1) ...(i)
f 1 2 ( 1) f
1 1
and = (r 1) ... (ii), where v and r are the refactive index for the
fr ( 1)
violet and red colours for the first lens.
For the second lens
1 1

= (v 1) f
fv ( 1)
1 1
and = (r 1) f
fr ( 1)
If Fv and Fr denote the focal lengths for the combination for these colours, then
1 1 1 v 1 1 v 1 1
= + = . + . ...(iii)
Fv f v f v 1 f 1 f
1 1 1 1 1 1
and = + = r . + r ...(iv)
Fr fr f r 1 f f
For an achromatic combination, Fv = Fr.

1 1
=
Fv Fr
( v 1) 1 ( v 1) 1 ( r 1) 1 ( r 1) 1
. + . = . + .
( 1) f ( 1) f ( 1) f ( 1) f
( v r ) 1 ( v r ) 1
or . + . =0
( 1) f ( 1) f
r v r
or + = 0 ( = v , = )
f f 1 1

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Answer 10. P
(a) Let the distance between the slits S1 and S2 be d and r1
the distance of the screen from the slits is D. The path y
S1
difference between the two waves from S1 and S2 r2

reaching at any point P on the screen is given by, d Q
O
xd d sin
S2
x = S2P S1P = Source
D D
(b) S. No. Interference Diffraction
1. All the bright fringes All the bright fringes are

have same intensity, i.e., not of the same intensity
are equally bright. i.e., are not equally
bright.
2. There is a good contrast There is a poor contrast

between the bright and between the dark and the
the dark fringes. bright fringes.
3. The width of the The width of the

interference fringes may diffraction fringes is
or may not be same. never same.
Answer 11.
(a) Case (i) : When the image is real, m = 4
v
= 4 or v = 4u
u
1 1 1
Now, =
f v u
1 1 1 1 1
= = 1 +
0.20 4u u u 4
1 5
=
0.20 4u
5
u = 0.20 m = 0.25 m
4
Case (ii) : When the image is virtual, m = + 4
v
= 4 or v = 4u
u
1 1 1 1 1
Again, = =
f v u 4u u
1 1 1 1 3 3
m1 = 1 m 1 = u = 0.20 m = 0.15 m
0.20 4 4 0.20 4u 4
(b) ray
SECTION-C
Answer 12.
(a) Here, the outputs Y1 and Y2 of AND and NOR gates, respectively, are the inputs of next NOR gate.
So the Truth Table of this combination of gates is :
A B Y1 Y2 Y
0 0 0 1 0
1 0 0 0 1
0 1 0 0 1
1 1 1 0 1

EVERGREEN
SERIES
From this table, it is found that for inputs A and B, the output Y gives the results same as XOR gate. So this
combination of gate is equivalent to XOR gate.
(b) The Boolean expression for the given set of gates is A + A.B
The truth table may be written as below :
A B A.B Y = A + A.B
0 0 0 0
0 1 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 1 1 1
Answer 13.
(a) In p-type semiconducor, holes are the charge carriers.
In p-type semiconductor, free e are the charge carriers.

(b) When a battery is connected to a p-n diode such that battery current is in the direction of diode current the
arrangement is called forward bias. The current in the circuit increases rapidly with the externally applied
voltage. If the battery connected to the diode carries current in the direction opposite to diode current, the
arrangement is called reverse bias. This current is very weak ( in microampere) and is almost steady with the
externally applied voltage. When applied voltage becomes very high, covalent bonds near the junction are
broken and all of a sudden reverse current increases manyfold.
I
l Forward
p n
current (mA)
+

Battery Reverse Forward
Forward bias net current = (l + I) voltage voltage
I
O
l
p n
Avalanche
+ Reverse
Battery current ( A)
Reverse bias net current = (l I )
Fig. (a) Fig. (b)
This phenomenon is called avalanche flow (breakdown) and the minimum potential to obtain it is called Zener
potential. This arrangement is used as potential barrier to regulate the potential in any circuit.
Answer 14.
(a) The circuit diagram is as shown below :
Input Ic
Voltage Ib RL Ic RL
Signal n-p-n Vce
B +
E Vce Amplified
Ie
+ Voltage
Signal
Vbb

EVERGREEN
SERIES
(b) When highly energetic electrons strike on a metal of high atomic number and melting point (like tungsten).
X-rays are produced. X-rays are electromagnetic waves of shorter wavelengths (1 to 100). X-rays of smaller
wavelengths have more penetrating power and are called hard X-rays while the X-rays of higher wavelengths
have lesser penetrating power and are called soft X-rays. Coolidge tube is used to produce X-rays. It is a
highly evacuated (106 cm of Hg) glass bulb, fitted with two electrodes having potential difference of nearly
20,000 volts. Cathode is made of tungsten and when it is heated with a battery B it emits electrons. Anode is
made of either tungsten or molybdenum and is inclined at 45 to the direction of the flow of electrons. Out
of 1000 striking electrons only one produces X-ray (nearly 0.1% ) and the rest produce heat energy hence
the anode becomes extremely hot. Therefore, a high speed water current is circulated round the anode. The
apparatus is enclosed in a lead box to prevent harmful radiations to come out. To increase the intensity of
X-rays, current in the filament is increased and to increase the energy (hard X-rays) of X-rays, potential
difference across the tube is increased.
220 V
20 kV
B+

F W
Lead box X-rays High speed water
If V is the potential difference across the two electrodes, energy of any striking electron would be eV and if
all this energy is utilised in the emission of one X-ray photon, then
hc
eV = hmax =
min
hc
or min =
eV
Answer 15.
(a) If light is a wave, it cannot eject an electron (a matter particle) from a metal. If possible, this ejection will
take place in hours after the fall of light. However, the e emits immediately from the metal. If the frequency
of light is less than threshold frequency v0, there is no emission of photo electron. This is also against the
wave theory that allows such emission.
Einstein explained the above laws on the basis of quantum theory of radiation. This theory states that radiation
of light is not a continuous phenomenon but discrete in nature in the form of small energy packets called
photons. Energy of each photon is hv and the time interval between the emissions of two successive photons
is nearly 108 second.
hc
According to Einstein, when a light ray photon of energy h or falls Light Ejected eof
ray photon remaining energy
on a metal surface, it transfers all of its energy to any one and only one h
free electron present in the metal. Two photons cannot give energy to
W
single electron and also two electrons cannot share the energy of single Metal
photon. The free electron after consuming the energy of photon moves e
out of the metal surface and loses part of this energy as work function
and the remaining as the kinetic energy of photo electron. Therefore, Work function
(minimum energy to leave
energy of photon = work function + kinetic energy of photo e. metal surface)
1
or h = W + mv 2
2
Since minimum frequency (threshold frequency) for a given metal is denoted by 0, the minimum energy
(work function) for a given metal W = h0. Hence,
1
h = h0 + mv2
2

EVERGREEN
SERIES
1 2
or h( 0 ) = m
2
If intensity of light is increased, more and more photons will fall on metal Since, each photon emits one photo
electron, more photoelectrons are emitted, i.e., more current will flow. This proves Lenard's first law, that
saturation current is proportional to intensity of incident light. Also, if frequency of light < 0, kinetic
energy of e will be negative. Hence, emission of photoelectrons is not possible. This proves the second law.
1
Comparing the equation mv2 = h W or Ek = h W with the equation of line Ek = mv A, we have
2
h = m, slope of equation and A = W, work function of metal.
h
(b) =
2 mE
6.6 10 34
=
2 1.67 10 27 1.6 10 19 500
= 1.28 1012 = 0.0128

EVERGREEN
SERIES

PART-I
Answer 1.
(A) (i) (d) Energy E = qV. As charge on both electron and proton is same, their energies will be same.
(ii) (a) Its emf should be constant.
0 4NI
(iii) (a) B=
4 l
(iv) (d) Aeroplane in horizontal motion will cut vertical component V of the earths magnetic field. But at equator
V = 0, hence, no emf will induce across the wings of the plane.
(v) (a)
(B) (i) m = ( 1)A
= (1.5 1)7 = 0.5 7 = 3.5.
surface area 4r 2
(ii) Solid angle = = = 4 sterdian.
(distance)2 r2
(iii) When in any atom electrons fall from one energy state to any lower energy states, one r
spectral line per transition is obtained as shown in figure. These lines are called S
characterstic X-rays.
Spherical surface
(iv) Binding energy per nucleon of boron is much lower than the binding K
energy per nucleon of iron.
(v) K L M N
A
Y
B
1C
(vi) 1 amp. = or 1 C = 1 amp. 1 sec.
1 sec.
(vii) Metals are good conductors and cannot store charge.
(viii) The needle will deflect from north-south position towards east-west position.

(ix) When two uniform magnetic fields F and H are at right angles and a small magnetic needle at the point of
their intersection makes an angle with H, then F = H tan .
1 1 1
(x) If R1 = R2 = + R ; = (n 1) R + R = 0 or P = 0
f 1 2
The lens should be equiconvexo or concave.
1.22 1.22 6 107

(xi) Limit of resolution, = = = 6 107 radian.
d 1.22
(xii) If a monochromatic light source is replaced by a white light source, only central fringe is white and rest are
coloured fringes.
(xiii) Minimum potential of anode at which plate current is zero.
(xiv) 13.6 eV energy is required to ionise the atom of hydrogen.
(xv) Adding the impurity (pentavalent or trivalent) in a pure germanium lattice to make either number of free
electrons more than holes or vice-versa is called doping.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
PART-II
SECTION-A
Answer 2.
(a) Let a spherical surface of radius r carries charges q on its surface.
Intensity at point P, distance R(R > r) away from the centre is required. Consider a spherical surface of radius
R with its centre at O.
Surface area of this surface, dS = 4R2 +q
q O
From Gausss theorem, E .dS = 0 r
q R
E(4R 2 ) =
0 P
q
or E = . This is the required formula.
4 0 R 2
V
(b) (i) E =
r
10 (10) 20
= 3
=
3 10 3 103
= 6.7 103 V/m.
0 A
(ii) C =
r
8.86 1012 20 104

=
3 103
= 5.93 1012 farad.

(iii) q = CV
= 15.93 1012 20
= 318.6 1012 coulomb.
Answer 3.
q1
(a) Potential of first conductor, V1 =
C1
q2
Potential of second conductor, V2 =
C2
Since the charge flows due to potential difference, no charge will flow.
If V1 = V2
q1 q
or = 2
C1 C2
l l metre
(b) Conductivity = = = = ohm 1 m 1.
resistivity() R.A ohm m 2
1
If l = 1 ; A = 1, conductivity = . Hence, conductivity of a conductor is reciprocal of the resistance of a
R
conductor of unit length and unit cross-section area.
Conductivity of a superconductor is infinite. Superconductor is a conductor which offers no resistance to the
flow of current.
Answer 4.
(a) In equilibrium when there is no deflection in galvanometer,
P R
= .
Q S

EVERGREEN
SERIES
The circuit diagram of a meter bridge is shown in figure. S
+
Resistance of the portion AJ is equal to P and resistance R.B. G
of the portion JB is equal to R of Wheatstone Bridge.
Resistance from the resistance box is R and unknown
resistance is S. If the length of null point AJ = 1, then l 100 l
A J C B
l (100 l )
P = and Q =
A A
A = area of cross-section of resistance wire. + ()
Cell Key
P l
=
Q 100 l
P R l R
In equilibrium, = or =
Q S 100 l S
100 l
S =
l
R. This is the required formula.
(b) Ampere circuital law states that the line integral of the magnetic around a closed path is equal to 0 times the
current enclosed by it.
Let a long solenoid of length l has n turns per unit length. The current in the solenoid is i. Let us consider a
closed rectangular surface abcda.
c d
Line integral of magnetic field around the closed path
b c d
a Bdl + b Bdl + c Bdl + = 0 I
where I is the current enclosed by the path abcda.
c a d
Since, b Bdl = d Bdl and c Bdl = 0; x' b a x
as line element cd is very far from the solenoid, we have l
b
a B.dl = 0I
nIx
Let the length ab be x, then I =
x
B.x = 0 (nIx)

or B = 0nI . This is the required equation.
Answer 5.
(a) When two metallic strips of iron and copper are joined at their Hot Fe Cold
ends (as shown in the figure) and one end is heated with respect junction junction
Cu
to other, a potential difference develops across the two ends. This
potential difference is called thermo emf and the effect is called G
Seebeck effect. The variation of thermo emf with temperature
is shown in the graph.
Neutral temperature
emt
(b) (i) When there is change of magnetic flux through a coil,

current induces in the coil.
(ii) emf of induced current is proportional to rate of change of Inversion temperature
magnetic flux through the coil. O n i
Temperature
d
e .
dt
Given, n = 200, A = 0.15 m2, t = 0.08 sec., B = 0.03 T
Initial flux 1 = BA cos = BA
Final flux 2 = BA cos 180 = BA
= 2 1
= BA BA = 2BA

emf induced in the coil e = n
t

EVERGREEN
SERIES
2BA
e = + 200
t
200 2 3 102 0.15

= = 22.5 volt.
8 102
Answer 6.
(a) Inductive reactance should be numerically equal to capacitive reactance.
XL = XC
1
or L =
C
1
2nL =
2nC
1
or n =
2 LC
This is the required condition for resonant frequency.
(b) E 0 = 2 E rms = 2 220 = 311 volt
= 2n = 2 3.14 50 = 314
Now, emf E = E0 sin t = 311 sin 314 t.
Answer 7.
(a) Self-induction of a coil,
(i) L square of number of turns (N)2,
(ii) L area of cross-section A,
1
(iii) L length of solenoid and
l
(iv) depends upon the permeability of material inside it.
(b) d = 2 1 = 0 3 102 = 3 102
d
From Faradays Law, e =n.
dt
3 102
= 50
20 103
= + 7.5 10 = 75 volt
e 75
Induced current, I = = = 0.75 A.
R 100
Induced charge, q = I t = 0.75 20 103
= 15 103 coulomb.
SECTION-B
Answer 8.
(a)
P

N1 N2
F
i1 i2
r2 m
r1
I1 I2
I
Q R
Variation of angle of incidence.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
(b) For convex lens L1, u = 40 cm, f = + 15 cm, v = ?
1 1 1
=
f v u
1 1 1
=
15 v 40
1 1 1 83
= =
v 15 40 120
120
v = = + 24 cm.
5
For concave lens L2, u = 24 14 = 10 cm, v = + 30 cm, f = ?
1 1 1
=
f v u
1 1 1 1 3
= =
f 30 10 30
30
f = = 15 cm.
2
Focal length of lens L2 is 15 cm.
Answer 9.
1 1 1
(a) Focal length of lens for violet colour, = (nv 1) R R ...(i)
fv 1 2
1 1 1
Focal length of lens for red colour, = (nr 1) R R ...(ii)
fr 1 2
1 1 1 1
n
R1 R 2
fv f r = (n v r )
fr fv nv nr 1 1
= n 1 (ny 1) R R
fv . fr y 1 2
fr f y 1
= (as f y2 = f v f r )
f y2 fy
or f r fv = f y
This is the required equation.
(b) AB is object placed between the lens and its first focus F. AB is the upright, virtual enlarged image.
Let KOB = and AOB = A'
A
K
F
O B B'
u
v=D
Eye
visual angle by image at O tan

Angular Magnification, M= visual angle by object at O = = tan
A B / B O A B A B v
M= = = = ...(i)
KB / B O KB AB u
EVERGREEN
SERIES
1 1 1
For lens, =
f v u
1 1 1
or = + ...(ii)
u f v
1 1 v D
From equations (i) and (ii), M= v + = + 1 = 1 + (as v = D)
f v f f
Answer 10. Grating
(a) Grating is mounted on the prism table. Eyepiece is fixed in the position
at 90 to the collimator. Prism table is rotated till reflected image of slit
L 45
from the grating is viewed in the eyepiece. Clearly, the grating is at 45
to the incident ray. This position of the table is recorded and then the 45
table is rotated by another 45 to make it complete 90 to the incident Prism table
rays. N
Eyepiece (E)
waves from these two sources have same amplitude, velocity, wavelength and a constant path difference.
S1
S O
S2
Screen
1
A biprism is a glass prism of refracting angle 179. The other two angles of the prism are
each. The rays
2
that fall on the middle of prism deviate by large angles and the rays that fall on the comers of the prism
become parallel. When these rays are produced, they appear emanating from the points S1 and S2. Hence,
S1, S2 appear as coherent sources.
The most coherent light source is LASER.
Answer 11.
(a) When a polaroid is rotated through 360 in front of :
(i) ordinary light, there is no change of intensity in transmitted light.
(ii) polarised light, intensity of transmitted light is maximum at = 0 and = 180 and minimum in rest
positions.
Polarised light with vibrations
in one direction only
Unpolarised light
with vibrations in
mutually Polarised light with
perpendicular vibrations in another
Pile of plates direction only
direction
(b) (i) Interference is due to the superposition of two wavefronts. Diffraction is due to the superposition of two
parts of the same wavefront.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
(ii) Interference fringes have the same width but the width of the diffraction bands goes on decreasing.
(iii) Interference fringes are more contrasty than diffraction bands.
SECTION-C
Answer 12.
hc
(a) =
0
hc 6.6 1034 3 108

or = 0 = = 6.188 107 m
2 1.6 1019
(b) Filament is made of tungsten. When heated it emits thermions.
y Perpendicular magnetic ?eld
+
SS
12
+ F Green spot

High +
potential 'V'

Fluorescent screen
y'
Slits S1 and S2 focus the electrons into a sharp beam.

Perforated anode A is used to accelerate electron beam to strike on the fluorescent screen at point P.
Magnetic field is used to force the electron beam to move on circular path.
Electric field is used to neutralise the effect of magnetic field.
The tube is maintained at high vacuum so that electrons do not lose energy due to collision with gas molecules.
Force on any electron in magnetic field, Fm = evB
Force on any electron in electric field Fe = eE
In equilibrium, when beam goes undeflected,
Fm = Fe
evB = eE
E
v =
B
1 2
If potential difference between cathode and anode is V, the kinetic energy of electron, mv =eV
2
e v2 E2
= =
m 2V 2VB2
e E2
= . This is the required equation.
m 2 VB2
Answer 13.
(a) In thermionic emission and in photoelectric emission, free electrons present in the metal are emitted.
In -particle emission, electron is emitted from the nucleus of a radioactive substance.
(b) Atomic model, Rutherford performed an experiment to study the structure of atom. Highly energetic -particles
were allowed to fall on a very thin gold foil. It was observed that most of the -particles crossed the foil
without any deviation, while some -particles (1 in 1000) deviated from their paths and this deviation was
found more and more towards fixed point. Very few particles (1 in 10000) striking at that particular point
retraced their path. This experiment suggested that positive charge of the atom is not uniformly distributed
all over the atom but is concentrated in a very small space at the centre of atom called nucleus. Electrons

EVERGREEN
SERIES
e
Gold foil target
Vacuum Moving e
about 10 m thick
Lead bricks
Most pass
through
Beam of
-particles +Ze

Source of Nucleus
-particles
ZnS Screen
Some are Moving electron radiates

deviated through Rutherford's energy and should fall
About 1 in 8000 a large angle
is reflected back Detector atom model into nucleus
(Microscope)
revolve around the nucleus on different circular paths. The positive charge on the nucleus is found to be the
integral multiple of electronic charge, 1.6 1019 coulomb. The integral multiple is known as the atomic
number Z of the atom.
Answer 14.
(a) Band spectrum is due to the substances in molecular state.
It consists of infinite number of spectral lines in one group called band. Number of bands are present in the
spectrum.
At very high temperature, molecules of break into atoms and line spectrum is obtained due to the atoms of
nitrogen.
(b) A moderator in nuclear reactor slows the speed of fast moving neutrons.
A controller in nuclear reactor absorbs the neutrons and changes the speed of nuclear reactions.
Answer 15.
(a) When X-rays incident on a stationary carbon atom, wavelength of scattered X-rays is found more than the
wavelength of incident X-rays. This phenomenon is called Compton scattering.
(i) Scattered X-ray photon loses some energy; hence, move with more wavelength.
(ii) The target electron absorbs part of the energy of incident X-ray photon and recoils.
(b) The network shows the NAND logic gate. The truth table is given below :
A B Y Y
0 0 0 1
0 1 0 1
Y = AB
1 0 0 1
1 1 1 0

EVERGREEN
SERIES

PART-I
Answer 1.
9 q1 q2
(A) (i) (d) Electric potential energy U = 9 10
r
1.6 1019 1.6 1019
= 9 10
9
; as q1 = q2 = 1.6 1019
1.6 1010
= 9 1.6 1019 = 1.44 1018 joule.
(ii) (a) When electric field is applied across the conductor, average speed of free electrons between two
consecutive collisions with positive ions is called drift velocity.
(iii) (b) Minimum temperature at which a ferromagnetic substance becomes paramagnetic is called Curie
temperature.
I
(iv) (d) T = 2 . Hence, T depends on moment of inertia I, magnetic moment M and horizontal
MH
component of earths field H.
n2 1.5
(v) (a) Since, n =
= < 1, nature of the lens will change and the convex lens will behave as concave lens.
n1 1.65
(B) (i) Minimum value of visual angle at which two objects are just separable is called limit of resolution.
(ii) Polariods are used in sunglasses and 3-D pictures.
(iii) X-rays show particle behaviour.
(iv) Vacancy of
Ge
one e or hole
Ge Al o Ge
Ge
A positive type (p-type) lattice
A
(v)
B Y' Y
It is combination of an AND and a NOT gate.

(vi) Electric force of attraction or repulsion between the two point charges is proportional to the product of charges
qq
and inversely proportional to the .square to distance between them. F 1 2 .
r2
2F 2F
A B
(vii) By connecting two capacitors in series and the third one in parallel to it.
2 F
(viii) More normality means more concentration of molecules in the electrolyte solution. These molecules offer
hindrance in the movement of ions. Hence, internal resistance of a cell increases with the rise in normality of
the electrolyte solution.
(ix) Capacitive reactance,
1 1 106
XC = = = = 6.37 102 = 637 ohm.
C 2 3.14 50 5 10 6 1570

EVERGREEN
SERIES
(x) P
N1
A
45 N2
Q R
A' B'
(xi) For achromatic combination
P1 2
=
P2 1
0.20 2
=
0.15 1
1 3
or =
2 4
(xii) Youngs double slit experiment proves the wave nature of light.
(xiii) To control the intensity of X-rays, current in the tube is increased.
h 6.6 1034
(xiv) = =
p 2 9 10 31 8000 1.6 10 19
6.6 1034 6.6 1034

= = = 0.138
144 16 1048 48 10 24
(xv) e1 + e+1 2 -ray photons.
0.51 MeV + 0.51 MeV 1.02 MeV.
Hence, energy of each -ray photon is 0.51 MeV.
PART-II
SECTION-A
Answer 2.
V 20
(a) (i) E = d = = 104 volt/m. 20 V
2 103
A = 0.2 m2
(ii) Since, lower plate is connected to earth, its potential = 0.
2 mm
0 A 8.86 10 12 0.2
(iii) C = = = 5.9 10 10 farad.
d 3
3 10
1 1
(iv) Energy E = CV 2 = 5.9 1010 20 20
2 2
= 1.18 107 joule.
(b) Figure shows the circuit diagram to find the ratio of emfs Battery
of the two cells E1 and E2. AB is 5 m long resistance wire +
connected to a 6V battery, rheostat and key. Positive
A
terminals of the two cells are connected to point A. Their
Rh
negative terminals are connected to a two-way key. The key
is connected to a galvanometer and a jockey that slides on 2 + J
E1 Key
the wire AB. Firstly, the cell of emf E, is put on by
connecting the terminals 1 and 2 of the key. Jockey is moved 1 3 + B
from A to B till the null point (zero deflection of E2
galvanometer) is obtained. G

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Let length of null point from A be l1. Then

E1 = l1, where = potential gradient ...(i)
Now, cell E2 is put is on by connecting the terminals 1 and 3 of the key. Null point is obtained again. If the
length of null point be l2, then
E2 = l2 ...(ii)
From equation (i) and (ii), we have
E1 l1
= . This is the required formula.
E2 l 2
Answer 3.
(a) Rt = R0 (1 + t). Here, is temperature coefficient of resistance. It indicates the increase in resistance of
conductor with each degree rise of temperature.
(b) Let us consider a circular coil of radius r carrying current I. Consider a
Q
small portion PQ of the coil having length dl. This portion is perpendicular dl
O P
to radius OP of the coil. From Biots law, magnetic field intensity at the r 90

centre of the coil due to the portion PQ,
Tangent
I
Idl sin 90 0 Idl
dB = 0 . = .
4 r2 4 r 2
For complete coil, dl = 2r. Hence, magnetic field at O due to complete coil
0 I (2 r )
B = .
4 r2
0 2 I
B = .
4 r
Answer 4.
(a) When two metallic strips of iron and copper are joined at their ends (as shown in the figure) and one end is
heated with respect to other, a potential difference develops across the two ends. This potential difference is
called thermo emf and the effect is called Seebeck effect. The variation of thermo emf with temperature is
shown in the graph.
Neutral temperature
emf
Hot Fe Cold
junction junction
Cu
Inversion temperature
G i
O n
Temperature
(b) Since, the conductors have current in same direction, they will attract each other with force,
7 I I
F = 2 10 l
r
In the position of weightlessness, this force will counterbalance, the weight of the lower conductor.
2 I
7 I
Therefore, 2 10 l = mg
r F
I
7 I2
2 10 2
1 = 0.1 103 9.8
2 10 mg
or I2 = 9.8 10 = 98
I = 9.9 A

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Answer 5.
(a) We know that torque on a coil in uniform magnetic field is = BIAn sin . If = 90, sin 90 = 1 and torque
= (BAn)I
or I
as B = magnetic field intensity, A = area of the coil and n = number of turns are constant; for a given coil.
As the torque depends only on the current, deflection of pointer would be linear.
The above holds only if the magnetic field is radial.
Now, to make = 90, radial magnetic field is produced by putting concave
soft iron pieces in front of poles of the magnet. These soft iron pieces, as
shown in figure, converge all magnetic lines of force at the centre of coil such N S
that the plane of coil is always perpendicular to lines of force.
(b) Let the rms value of current be Irms . Now,
I2rms = I2 for a complete cycle

= (I0 sin t)2 for a complete cycle
2
= I0 sin t dt for a complete cycle
2 2
0
1 2 1
2
I2rms = I0 . as sin 2 t dt =
2 0 2
I0
or Irms = . This is the required equation.
2
Answer 6.
(a) Each atom of the substance behaves as a tiny magnet. In some substances when placed in a strong magnetic
field, few atoms change their orientation to have their magnetic fields in the direction of external field. Hence,
a small magnetic field is induced in the substance in the direction of external field. These substances are
called paramagnetic substances. When most of atoms of any substance show this behaviour, it is called
ferromagnetism.
(b) Given, H = 3 105 T and V = 4 105 T.
V
If angle of dip is , then tan =
H
4 105
tan = = 1.33
3 10 5
= 53.
Answer 7.
2 rH
(a) For tangent galvanometer, I = tan
0N
As I, r and H are same, tan N

EVERGREEN
SERIES
tan 1 N1 50 1
or = = =
tan 2 N 2 500 10
where 1 and 2 are the deflection of the pointer in the two cases.

(b) Lorentzs force experienced by a charged particle moving with velocity in field B, is

F = q( B)

is along x-axis, B is along y-axis.

( v B) is along z-axis as per screw rule.
If charge is negative, force is along z direction.
If charge is positive, force is along +z direction.
SECTION-B
Answer 8.
(a) Huygens principle states that each point on the surface of primary wavefront is the source of secondary
wavelets.
N1 N1
Incid nt
ent I2 R1 vefro
wav
ef cted wa
ront Refle
I1 B D R2
i i r r
P A C Q
Let PQ be a reflecting surface. I1I2 is an incident plane wavefront that falls on this surface at angle of incidence
i. AB is the last incident plane wavefront that reflects as CD at angle of reflection r.
i + N1AB = 90 = N1AB + BAC
or BAC = i
Also, r + N2CD = 90 = N2CD + DCA
or DCA = r
The time in which the disturbance travels from point B to C is equal to the time in which the disturbance
travels from point A to D.
Hence, length BC = length AD.
In triangles ABC and ADC, BC = AD
B = D = 90
AC is common
Hence, the triangles are congruent (by SAS) and BAC = DCA.
It implies that i = r, which proves the law of reflection.
(b) For convex lens u = 20 cm, f = + 10 cm, v = ?
1 1 1
=
f v u
1 1 1
or =
10 v 20
1 1 1 1
or = =
v 10 20 20
or v = 20 cm

EVERGREEN
SERIES
C
O
I'
R = 2f = 10 cm
The image I will form at 20 cm from the convex lens or 10 cm from the concave mirror. Since, focal length of
mirror is 5 cm, its radius of curvature R = 2f = 2 5 = 10 cm. Hence, point I is also the centre of the mirror.
It means the light rays are falling normally on the mirror and therefore, will retrace the path. Final image of O
will form at O itself.
Answer 9.
(a) The figure shows the ray diagram of astronomical telescope.
L0 f0
Le
ue Eye
Q' Q
O O'
P
ve
P'
Angular magnification,
visual angle by final image

M=
visual angle by object
tan
= = (as and are very small angles)
tan
PQ / QO QO f0
= PQ / QO = QO = u ...(i)
e
1 1 1
Now, for Le lens, = (with proper sign)
fe ve ue
1 1 1
or = + ...(ii)
ue f e ve
1 1
M = f 0 +
f e ve
f 0 fe
M=
f e 1 + v
e
This is the required equation.

(b) Limit of resolution . If electron wave ( = 1 ) is used instead of ordinary wave ( = 6000 ), limit of
resolution will decrease 6000 times and very minute objects can he seen distinctly.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Answer 10.
(a) fr fv = fy
f r f v 0.2
or = = = 0.01.
f 20
waves from these two sources have same amplitude, velocity, wavelength and a constant path difference. A
biprism is used to produce two coherent sources.
Answer 11.
(a) I = I0 cos2
I 2.5 1
Given, I0 = 10 W/m2, I = 2.5 W/m2. Hence, cos2 = = =
I0 10 4
1
or cos = = 60.
2
A'
(b)
A
K
F
O B B'
u
v=D
Eye
A simple microscope
visual angle by the image at O

M=
visual angle by the object at O
tan A B / B O
M= = =
tan KB / B O
A B A B D I v
= = = as = ...(i)
KB AB u O u
1 1 1
Now, for lens = as u and v both are ve
f v u
1 1 1
or = + ...(ii)
u f v
From eqns. (i) and (ii), we have
1 1
M = D +
v f
Since, v= D
D
M= 1+
f
D
For relaxed eye when image forms at infinity, magnification M = .
f
SECTION-C
Answer 12.
e E2 (105 )2 1010
(a) = = = = 1.5 1010 coulomb/kg.
m 2VB2 2 103 (1.8 102 )2 2 103 3.24 104

EVERGREEN
SERIES
nh
(b) (i) Electrons revolve around the nucleus in quantised orbits in which angular momentum of electron is .
2
(ii) When an electron falls from one quantised orbit to any lower orbit, it loses energy in the form of light ray
photon. Energy of the photon is equal to the difference of energy of two levels.
En2 En1 = h2
Radius of Bohrs orbit r n2
r1 n12 (1)2 1
= 2 = =
r2 n2 (3) 2 9
or r2 = 9r = 9 0.51 = 4.59 .
Answer 13.
(a) Saturation current I l
I1 l1 5 l
= = I 2 = 20 mA.
I2 l2 I 2 4l
(b) Some artificially prepared isotopes like Na24, U239 are called radioisotopes. These are used in medical diagnosis
and therapy. They are also used in agriculture.
Answer 14.
(a) The rate of disintegration of a radioactive substance is proportional to the amount or substances at that instant
dN
N.
dt
n
N 1
Again, = , Given, N = 0.125 mg, N0 = 1 mg
N0 2
n n 3 n
0.125 1 1 1 1 1
= , = = n = 3.
1 2 8 2 2 2
6
Since, three half-lives are completed in 6 years, average half-life = 2 years.
3
(b) S is a source of positive ions. Slits S1 and S2 convert positive S
S1
ions in the form of a sharp beam. This beam is accelerated by a S2
high voltage perforated cathode C. C
B
The beam of positive ions is allowed to enter through mutually
x
perpendicular electric and magnetic fields. Under the influence
of both fields, the beam passes undeflected. In equilibrium,
qvB = qE
B' r1
E r2
or v= ...(i)
B
Since, E and B are constants, positive ions of uniform speed enter in another magnetic field B perpendicular to
the direction of B. Lorentz force allows these positive ions to move on circular path of radius r. In equilibrium,
mv 2
qvB =
r
q v E
or = =
m r B r B B

EVERGREEN
SERIES
The circular path of the positive ions is photographed through Wilsons cloud chamber. Hence, the value of
q/m is obtained.
q 1
Again, . It is observed that for some nuclei, two or three circular paths of different radii are obtained.
m r
Clearly, m is different for these ions. It gives the presence of isotopes as the particular nucleus.
Answer 15.
(a) 4B10
(b) T is a step-up transformer. When input signal is applied on its + p
n
primary, an increased potential is obtained on secondary. D is a
p-n diode. When upper end of the secondary becomes positive,
diode becomes forward biased and output current is obtained across Input
load RL. After half cycle, when polarity of the signal at upper end
+ +
of secondary becomes negative, diode becomes at reverse bias
RL
T
and no current is obtained on the output. Hence, the current is + + +
obtained only in the positive half cycle. Output

EVERGREEN
SERIES

PART-I
Answer 1.
(A) (i) (a) Zero. The electric field due to a charged ring at its centre is zero. A disc is nothing but a family of
rings whose radius vary from 0 to 1 cm.
(ii) (b) The new resistance will be 22 = 4
(iii) (a) T = 2 I/MH
(iv) (c) Eddy current are the currents induced in the body of the conductor due to the motion of electrons.
(v) (a) Scattering of sunlight from air, dust particles present in the atmosphere.
1.22 6000 1010

(B) (i) = 1.22 = = 6 107 radian.
D 1.22
(ii) Luminous flux of a light source is the amount of light energy emitted by a source per sec.
(iii) K.E. = eVS = 1.6 1019 0.64 joules
= 0.64 eV
(iv) Doping mean putting an impurily atoms in a desired quantity in a semiconductor.
2He + 4Be = 6C + 0n
(v) 4 9 12 1
(vi) An electric line of force is path straight or curved along which a unit positive charge will move if free
to do so.
(vii) H = I2 Rt = 1.2 1.2 200 12 60 J
= 207360 J
(viii) It increases with the increase in the normality of electrolyte.
XL 628
(ix) XL = 2nL, L = = =1H
2n 2 3.14 100
(x) In sky wave propagation, the waves transmitted from the transmitting antenna are received by the
receiving antenna after they suffer reflection from the ionosphere layer of the atmosphere. The sky wave
prapogation is limited to frequency range of 2 to 3.0 MHz.
(xi) Interference is due to the superposition of the waves from two coherent sources whereas diffraction is
due to superposition waves starts from the two halves of the same wave front i.e., light from a single
source.
(xii) = ( 1) A, = (1.5 1) 8 = 4.
(xiii) Since the electron and proton have the same charge, they will acquire the same energy when accelerated
through V volts.
h 1
Now, = i.e.,
2 mE m
Since mass of the electron is less, its de-Broglie wavelength will be more.
(xiv) The frequency and the atomic number of the target element are related as
(Z a)
where Z is the atomic number and a is constant.
(xv) In materialisation of energy, energy is converted into mass. When a photon is incident on a heavy nucleus,
it is absorbed by the heavy nucleus and as a result an electron-positron pair is created.
PART-II
SECTION-A E
Answer 2.
(a) Let Q be the charge on a sphere of radius r. To find the electric intensity at a point ds
r
on the sphere, draw a spherical Gaussian surface E and ds at every point will
be directed outwards, Q = 0.

EVERGREEN
SERIES

E . ds = E 4r2 ... (i)
Also, by Gausss law
Q
E . ds =
0
... (ii)

1
E 4r2 = .Q
0
1 Q
E =
4 0 r 2
dV
Also, E =
dr
d V = Edr
V r
1 1 Q
4 0
= . 2 . dr
4 0 r
0 0
1 Q r 2 + 1 1 Q
V =
4 0 = 4 r
1 0
5 10 10
(b) Since the two capacitors are connected in series, their combined capacity = = F
15 3
Charge through the capacitor is
10 1000 100 V
Q = CV = 100 = C
3 3
5 F 10 F
1000
C
Potential difference across the second capacitor = 3
10 F
100
= = 33.3 V
3
Potential of second plate of the capacitor = 33.3 V
Answer 3.
(a) Drift velocity is the average velocity of the electrons with which they drift from one end of the conductor to
the other when a potential difference is applied across its ends. It is divided by vd.
If a is the area of cross-section, n the number density of the electron and vd the drift velocity of the electron.
Time taken by the electron to drift from one end of the conductor to the other.
l
t = v
d
In a time all the electrons contained in the conductor will have crossed over to the other.
Q = Ne = a l ne
Q
Current, I =
t
a ln e vd
I =
l
I = nae vd
I
vd = is the required relation.
nad

EVERGREEN
SERIES
(b) Yes, it can be, when the cell is being charged with the help of an external source. Normally, V E, because
some fall of potential will take place when the current is being drawn from it. If the current flows through the
cell from +ve to ve terminal, then
V = E + Ir
Answer 4.
(a) The distribution of current is as shown in the fig. Applying Kirchhoffs second law to the mesh ABEFA
2I2 + 2I1 = 4 ... (i)
To the mesh BCDE, I1 4V 2
A F
6(I1 + I2) + 2I2 = 1
1V 2
6I1 + 6I2 + 2I2 = 1 B E
I2
6I1 + 8I2 = 1 ... (ii)
C D
Also, from 2I1 2I2 = 4
6
or 8I1 8I2 = 16 ... (iii)
Adding (ii) and (iii), we have
17
14I1 = 17 or I1 = A
14
Putting this value of I1 in (i), we have
17
2I2 = 4 2
14
22
2I2 =
14
11
I2 = A
14
60 60
(b) Here, T1 = = 6 s, T2 = =5s
10 12
Let B be the magnetic field produced by the magnet, then
I
6 = 2 ... (i)
MH
1
and 5 = 2 ... (ii)
M(B + H)
Squaring and dividing (i) by (ii), we have
36 B+ H B
= = +1
25 H H
B 36 11
or = 1=
H 25 25
11
B = 0.3 = 0.132 Gauss
25
Answer 5.
(a) Let I be the current through the long conductor. To find the magnetic field at P, a point at distance r from the
condutor. The lines of force, due to symmetry will be circular. If we draw a circular path of radius r around

the conductor, then B and dl will point in the same direction. D

B . dl = B dl cos 0 I
dl
P
r
dl
= B
= B 2r ... (i)

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Also, by Amperes circuital law

B . dl = 0 I ... (ii)
Comparing (i) and (ii), we have
B 2r = 0I
0 I
B = .
2 r r
1
or B
r
(b) Curie temperature is the minimum temperature at which a ferromagnetic substance becomes paramagnetic.
Its value for steel is about 86C.
Answer 6.
(a) Here, = 30 m, c = 3 108 m
C = 12 pF = 12 1012F, L = ?
1
v =
2 LC
c2 1
= 2
2 4 LC
(3 108 )2 1
=
(30) 2 4LC
1
107 107 =
4LC
1
L =
4 (3.14) 12 1012 107 107
2
1
= mH = 0.02 mH
4 12 9.87 102
(b) Force of attraction per unit length between two long parallel wires carrying currents I1 and I2 ampere and
separated by a distance r is
F 2I I
= 0 1 2 Nm1
l 4 r
F
If = 2 107 or I1 = I2 = I and r = 1 m, then
l
I2 = 1 or I = 1 ampere
An ampere of current is defined as that current which when flowing through each of two infinitely long
parallel wires 1 m apart in vacuum results in a force of 2 107 Nm1 on each of them.
Answer 7.
(a) Here, Erms = 220 V and Irms = 5 A
E0 = 2 Erms = 1.414 220 = 282.8 V
and I0 =
2 Irms = 1.414 5 = 7.07 A
(b) rms of an a.c. is that value of the steady current which when flowing through a circuit for a time equal to the
time period of an G.C. produces the same amount of heat as is produced by the a.c. when flowing through the
same circuit for the same time period.
Mean value of an a.c. is that steady current which will sent the same charge through a circuit in a time equal
to half the time period of a.c. as is sent by a.c. in the same circuit in the same time. It is denoted by Ia.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Relation : The small amount of charge sent by a.c. in a small dt is

dq = I dt
T/2 T/2
Q = I dt = I sin t dt
0 0
T/2
= I0 cos t

0
I0 T
= cos cos 0
2
I0 2I0 I T
= [ 1 1] = .T = 0 ... (i)
2 Q
T
Also, Q = Iav
2
T I
Iav = 0 T
2
2I0
Iav =

2I0
Similarly, average value of a.c. current over the next half cycle will be .

2I0 2I0

Average value over a full cycle = =0
2
Similarly, average value of the emf over a full cycle is zero.
SECTION-B
Answer 8.
(a) The shape of the wavefront reflected from a convex mirror is as shown :
Convex mirror
Plane wavefront
P
Reflected wavefront
(b) A colourful interference pattern is observed when

interference takes place between the light reflected from the
top and the bottom of thin film. The incident light waves
reflected from the upper and the lower layer interfere with
each other to form a new wave. The path difference between
the two waves depends upon the (i) thickness of the film t
(ii) refractive index of the thin plane. These colours will
reinforce for which constructive inteference takes place.
Answer 9.
(a) According to Lens maker formula
1 1 1
= ( 1) , where f is focal length and the refractive index of
f R
1 R 2
the material of the lens.
1 1 1
= ... (i)
R1 R 2 ( 1) f

EVERGREEN
SERIES
If fr and fv are the focal lengths of the lens for the red and violet colours and r and v in the corresponding
refractive indices, then
1 1 1 1
= (v 1) = (v 1) ... (ii)
fv R1 R 2 ( 1) f
1 1
and = (r 1) ... (iii)
fr ( 1) f
Subtracting (iii) from (ii), we have
1 1 1
= [v 1 r 1]
fv fr ( 1) f
fr fv 1
( r ) =
f v f r = ( 1) f v f
fr fv v r
or 2 =
f = 1
f
or fr fv = f, which is the required relation.
(b) Here, d = thickness = t
If v is the velocity of light in the medium, then
c
=n
v
c
v =
n
Time taken to cover the distance t
t t
T = = .n
v c
t
T =
c
Answer 10.
(a) For the first convex lens
u = 15 cm, f = + 20 cm, v = ?
1 1 1
Now, =
v u f
1 1 1 3 4 1
=+ = =
v 20 15 60 60
v = 60 cm
The image is virtual and is at a distance of 60 + 30 = 90 cm from the second convex lens. It serves as a
real objects for the second lens.
For the second lens
u = 90 cm
v =?
f = 15 cm
1 1 1
Again, =
v u f
1 1 1
+ =
v 90 15
1 1 1 6 1 5
or = = =
v 15 90 90 90

EVERGREEN
SERIES
90
v = = 18 cm
5
The final image is formed at a distance of 18 cm behind the second lens.
(b) The required angle is given by
tan ip = 1.33
i p = tan1 1.33
i p = 53.06
Answers 11.
(a) Here, f0 = 1 cm, fe = 5 cm, u = 1.1 cm
The positions of the object and the images are as shown. f = 5 cm
For the objective lens f = 1 cm
u = 1.1 cm, v = ?, f = 1 cm 5 cm
1 1 1
Now, =
v u f
1.1 cm
16 cm
Objective
1 1 = 1 or 1 = 1 1 1.1 1 1 Eyepiece
+ = =
v 1.1 1 v 1.1 1.1 11
v = 11 cm
The distance of the image from the eye lens is 16 11 = 5 cm
For the eye lens
u = 5 cm, f = 5 cm
Thus, object is at the focus of the eye lens and the final image will be formed at infinity.
v D 11 25
Magnification = = = 50
u fe 1.1 5
(b) Danger signals are red. This is because according to Rayleighs law, the intensity of the scatterd light from
the air molecule is inversly proportional to the fourth power of the wavelength. This red colour due to its
large wavelength is scattered the least. Hence, the red can travel of large distances before it disappears. Hence,
danger signals are red.
SECTION-C
Answer 12.
(a) According to Einstein equation
c
h = 0 + eVS

hc
1 = 0 + eV1 ... (i)
hc
and = 0 + eV2 ... (ii)
2
Subtracting (ii) from (i), we have
1 1
hc = e[V1 V2]
1 2
1
hc 2 = e [V1 V2]
1 2
hc[ 2 1 ]
V1 V2 = 1 2 e
(6000 4500) 1010 3 108

= 6.6 1034
6000 4500 1020 1.6 1019
1500 1010 3 108

= 6.62 1034
6000 4500 1020 1.6 1019

EVERGREEN
SERIES
6.62 15 3
=
6 45 1.6
= 0.67 V
i.e., slopping decreases with the increase in 1034 wavelength of the incident light.
(b) Coolidge.
S
Cooling
B pipes Cu ROD
C AC
K
Water Water
A Anticathode
X-Rays
The intensity of the X-ray produced depends upon the number of electrons striking against the anticathode
which further depends upon the heating current. Thus, by controlling the heating the intensity of X-ray can
be controlled.
Answer 13.
(a) Postulates of Bohrs atom model :
(i) The electron, the hydrogen atom revolve round the nucleus. The necessary centripetal force is provided
by the electrostatic force of attraction.
mv 2 1 e2
i.e., = ... (i)
r 4 0 r 2
(ii) Only those orbital are allowed in which the angular momentum is quantised. v
nh
i.e., mvr = ... (ii) +e
2 m
r
(iii) The emission or absorption of energy takes place only when the electron jumps
from one orbit to the other.
Ei Ef = hv i.e., energy is also quantised.
We know rn n2, where rn is the radius of the nth orbit.
r3 9
=
r1 1
r3 = 9r1 = 9 0.51 = 4.59
(b) Energy emitted per sec. by 40 W lamp = 40 J
= 6200 = 6200 1010 m
If N is the number of photons emitted per sec., then
c
U = Nh

U 40 6200 1010 4 62 107

N = = =
ch 3 108 6.6 1034 3 6.6 1026
4 62
= 1019 = 1.25 1025
3 6.6

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Answer 14.
(a) Energy band diagram : We know that a single atom has a discrete well separated energy levels. When a large
number of atoms are close to each other, as in a solid, these energy levels split and spread into a band called
the energy band. There are several energy bands and they are separated by forbidden energy gaps. The
ranges corresponding to states which can be occupied by valence electrons finding the atoms called the valence
band. The ranges which correspond to the states in which electrons can be made to conduct when electric
field is applied on the solid is called the conduction band.
CB CB CB
7eV Energy gap 1 eV Energy gap Overlapping

region
Valence Valence VB
band band
Insulator Semiconductor Metals
(i) In an insulator, the C.B. (Conduction Band) is empty but the valence band is full. There is a large energy gap
between them ( ~ 7eV) as in fig. 1.
(ii) In semiconductor, the forbidden energy gap is ~ 1 eV and can be overcome by the the thermal energy. The
electrons in the valence band absorb energy and cross over to C.B. It is shown in fig. 2.
(iii) In metal, there is no forbidden energy. In this case, either the valence band is itself a conduction band with
empty energy states or the conduction band overlaps the valence band as in fig. 3. above.
(b) Full wave rectifier : The circuit diagram of a full wave rectifier is as shown in the fig. Here, we use two
diodes.
Suppose during the first half of the input a.c. cycle, S1 is + ve and S2 is ve. The diode D1 will conduct
because it is forward biased and D2 will be cut off since it is reverse biased. As the input varies the output
current and voltage also varies. The input and the output voltage are shown. The output consists of a fluctuating
d.c., which ineffect is a combination of a pure d.c. and a.c. of different frequencies.
If E0 is the peak value of a.c. input voltage across the secondary, then peak current
E0
I0 = , where rf is the forward resistance.
RL + rf
2I0
and d.c. current = B A
+
I0
and rms current =
2
V
Voltage
Input Time
Answer 15.
(a) A chain reaction : In the fission of 92U238, when started by neutrons, two or three neutrons are produced which
produce further fission of U238 producing more neutrons. In every fission, energy is released. If this fission is
allowed to proceed unchecked, then the nuclear reaction is said to be uncontrolled. During, uncontrolled fission,
a large amount of energy is produced which can cause havoc as in the case of the atomic bomb.
On the other hand, if the neutrons produced are absorbed and only one neutron is allowed to proceed with
further reaction, the nuclear reaction is said to be controlled. In controlled chain reaction, the number of fissions
in a given time is kept constant by absorbing the excess neutrons.
The energy so produced can be used for useful purposes as in the case of a nuclear reactor. The various parts
of a nuclear reaction are :
1. Fission chamber : It is the chamber in which the fissionable material takes place. Uranium enritched with
235 is used as a fuel. It is contained in aluminium tubes.
92U
2. Moderator : Its function is to slow down the fast moving neutrons. Heavy water, deuterium and paraffin are
used.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
3. Control rod : These rods help to control the chain reaction and prevent it from becoming violent. These rods
are of material like cadmium or boron.
4. Coolant : It takes up the heat energy produced in the nuclear reaction and pass it on water in a heat exchanger.
Liquid sodium or heavy water is used.
5. Shielding : The whole reactor is protected with a thick concrete shield to avoid any harmful effects of radiation
emitted during fission.
(b) T = 3.8 days, m0 = 1024 mg,
t = 38 days, m = ?
In terms of mass left behind of radon can be found from the relation
m = m0 et
t /T 38
10
m 1 1 3.8 1
Also, = = =
m0 2 2 2
10
m = 1024
1 mg
2
1 1
= 1024 = 1 mg
32 32

EVERGREEN
SERIES

PART-I
Answer 1.
A0
(A) (i) (c) Three capacitors each of capacity are in parallel.
d
P R
(ii) (b) Since = , it is a balanced wheatstone bridge. The resistance of 8 is ineffective. The series
Q S
combination 2 and 4 is in parallel with the series combination of 6 and 12 .
6 18
Equivalent resistance is = = 4.5
6 + 18

(iii) (a) The angle between B and v is zero,
F = qvB sin = qvB 0 = 0
1
(iv) (c) sin C = , C will be large when is smallest. Since g is the least C will be largest for glass.

(v) (a) By the definition of half life, the mass disintegrating in three half lives will be 6 + 3 + 1.5 = 10.5 g.
(B) (i) Invariance of charge implies that the value of charge does not depend upon its state of motion.
i.e., whether it is at rest or is in motion.
I I
(ii) I = naevd or vd = . Clearly, vd . Thus, the drift velocity will increase as the electrons move from
nae a
the end A to the end B.
(iii) q = 3t2 + 5t + 7
dq
I == 6t + 5
dt
At t = 5, I = 35 A
(iv) According to the series law
1 = 1 + 1 + 1
R R1 R 2 R 3
1
or G= G1 + G2 + G3 G =
R
(v) M = IA = 0.25 2 102 2 102
= 3.14 102 Am2
(vi) A super conductor is a material which offers no resistance.
(vii) In this case, the charged particle moves in a circular path. The path thus continuously changes.
(viii) The area of the hysteresis loop for iron is less than the area of the loop for steel. Steel has large coercivity
and iron has large retentivity.
v D
(ix) M = 1 + f , where the letters have their using meanings.
u e
D
(x) (a) = , when the width of the source slit is increased the intensity of the individual sources will
d
increase. As a result the maxima will become brighter and contrast between the fringes will increase. The
same effect will be observed when the source slit is moved closer to the slits.
1
(xi) We know = = tan ip
sin C
cosec C = tan ip
or C = cosec1 (tan ip)
(xii) Decreasing the wavelength of incident light means increasing the frequency. The frequency has no effect
on the saturation current.
(xiii) The mass of atoms left behind is 25%.
N 25 1 1 2
i.e., = e t = = = ... (i)
N0 100 4 2

EVERGREEN
SERIES
N n
1
Also, =
N0 2 ... (ii)
n = 2 half lives = 2 10 = 20 days
(xiv) If E1, E2 and E3 are the energies corresponding to the energy levels A, B and C.Then
hc
E1 E3 = ... (i)
1
hc
E1 E2 = ... (ii)
2
hc
and E2 E3 = ... (iii)
3
Subtracting (i) from (ii), we have
1 1
E2 E3 = hc

2 1
hc 1 1
= hc
3
2 1
1 1 1
or =
3 2 1
1 1 1
or + =
1 3 2
Amplitude modulation : It is the process of superimpose of a low frequency message signal on a high
frequency signal which carries the signal. In amplitude, the the amplitude of the carrier is changed in
accordance and with the instantaneous value of modulating signal.
PART-II
SECTION-A
Answer 2.
1
(a) Gausss theorem states that the total outward flux through a closed surface enclosing charges is equal to
0
times the net charge enclosed by it.
Consider an infinite plane sheet having a surface charge density Cm2. To find the electric intensity at P near
it, draw a cylindrical Gaussian surface piercing through the sheet. Let S be the face area of the cylinder. Due to

symmetry E is directed outwards. E and ds are parallel to each other on the face area but are mutually
perpendicular on the curved surface of the cylinder. Charge enclosed by the closed surface = S.

Now, E . ds = E . ds + E . ds + E . ds
S1 S2 Curved surface area
= E ds cos 0 + E ds cos 0 + E ds cos 90

S1 S2
= ES1 + ES2 = 2ES ... (i) (S1 = S2 = S)
Also, by Gausss theorem S E

E . ds =
0 P
ds E
S S2 S1 ds
2ES =
0

or E= away from the sheet
2 0
(b) The variation of electric intensity of a charged hollow spherical shell is
shown. Let R be the radius of the spherical shell.
E
r>R
O
R r

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Answer 3.
(a) Let C be the capacity of the parallel capacitor and V be the potential to which it is charged. Let Q be the charge
on. Q
V= ... (i)
C
When the dielectric is introduced, its capacity increases K times and potential decreases. To restore the potential,
the charge is now 3Q. 3Q
V= ... (ii)
KC
From (i) and (ii) Q 3 Q
= .
C K C
K =3
(b) A galvanometer is very sensitive device and is suitable only for measuring very small current of the order of A.
To enable it to measure large current, it has to be converted into an ammeter. For this a suitable low resistance
called the shunt resistance is put in parallel with. The value of this low resistance depends upon the range of
conversion.
Let Ig be the maximum safe current through the galvanometer and S
I Maximum current to be measured
G Galvanometer resistance I
G
S Required shunt resistance
The current through the shunt resistance = I Ig
The potential difference across the galvanometer and shunt resistance is the same because they are in parallel.
(I Ig) S = Ig G
GI g
S=
I Ig
Answer 4.
(a) Here, in the first case, l1 = 60 cm, l2 = 100 60 = 40 cm
Since the bridge is balanced
X l 60 3
= 1 = = ... (i)
Y l2 40 2
When a resistance of 15 is connected in series with Y, the null points shifts towards A by 10 cm.
X 50
= ... (ii)
Y + 15 50
When the resistance of 30 is connected in parallel, let the balance point be at a distance l from the end A.
X
30Y = l
30 + Y 100 l
X(30 + Y) l
= ... (iii)
30Y 100 l
3
from (i) X= Y
2
Putting this value of X in (ii) 3
Y
2
=1
Y + 15
3
Y = Y + 15
2
Y= 30
3
and X = 30 = 45
2
Putting the values of X and Y in (iii), we get
45 60 l
=
30 30 100 l
l
3=
100 l
300 3l = l
300 = 4l
l = 75 cm

EVERGREEN
SERIES
(b) Resistivity of a material is defined as the resistance of a unit length of that material and having a unit area of
cross-section.
we know that the resistance R of a conductor of length l and area of cross-section a is given
l
R=
a
V
But R=
I
V l
= ... (i)
I a
Also, if E is the electric field across the length of the conductor, then
V= E l
and I = naevd
V El El
= =
I n a e vd Ee
nae
m
V ml
= ... (ii) where is the relaxation time
I n a e2
Comparing (i) and (ii)
l ml
=
a n a e2
m
=
n a e2
Answer 5.
(a) (i) When the resistance R is increased, the balance point will shift toward B. This is so because, due to increase
in resistance R, the current through the potentiometer wire decreases and hence the potential gradient
decreases. As a result, the balancing length of the wire increases. The balance point shifts toward B.
(ii) When S is increased, keeping R constant; the potential gradient is uneffected and hence the balanced
point will remain at X.
(iii) When cell P is replaced by another cell whose emf is lower than that of Q, the balance will not be obtained
on the wire. For the balance point to be on potentiometer wire, the emf of the driver cell must be higher.
(b) Here, B1 = 1.2 102 T
1 = 15, 2 = 60 15 = 45
In the equilibrium position, the torque experienced by the magnetic dipole due to the two fields must be equal
and opposite. If M is the magnetic dipole moments of dipole, then
MB1 sin 1 = MB2 sin 2 B2
B1 sin 1 = B2 sin 2
sin 15
B2 = 1.2 102 sin 45
0.259 N
= 1.2 102 = 4.4 103 T 45
M
0.707 60
S 15 B1
Answer 6.
(a) According to growth of charge on a capacitor C through a resistor R, the charge Q on the capacitor at any time t
is given by
t

Q = Q0 [1 e CR ] ,
where Q0 is the maximum charge on the capacitor and CR is the time constant.
99.9
Now, Q= Q = 0.999 Q0
100 0
t

0.999Q0 = Q0 [1 e CR ]
t

0.999 = 1 e CR
t

or e CR = 1 0.999 = 0.001 = 103
Taking logarithm to the base e on both sides
t
= ( 3) 2.303
CR
t = 6.909 CR = 7 times constant
EVERGREEN
SERIES
(b) Gyromagnetic ratio of an electron is defined as the ratio of magnetic moments of a system to its angular momentum.
Consider an electron of mass me to be revolving in a circle of radius r with an angular frequency . The revolving

electron constitutes a current and hence the electrons behaves as a dipole having dipole moments m given by
^
m = i a ( k ), where k^ is a unit vector in the upward direction. J
^
m = ia k = i r2 k
e ^ e ^
= r 2 k = r 2 k
T 2
e 2 ^
m = r k ... (i)
2
Now, angular momentum J is given by
m
J = mvr = mr2 ( v = r)
^
Since the electron resolves in the anticlockwise direction. J point in the + ve direction of k .
^
J = mr2 k

m e e
= or m = J
2m 2m
J
Answer 7.
(a) In the series LCR circuit, E and I are given by

E = 200 sin 314t +
6
I = 5 sin 314t
Comparing with the standard equation of an a.c. i.e. E = E0 sin t, we get
E0 = 200 V, = 314 radians s1
If n is the frequency of a.c., then
= 2n = 314
314
or n= = 50 Hz
2 3.14
Also, I0 = 5 A
(i) Peak value of the current = 5 A
(ii) Frequency of a.c. = 50 Hz
(iii) Power factor of the circuit
k = cos ( being the phase angle)

= cos 60 =
3
1
k=
2
(b) Self inductance of a solenoid : Let N be the total number of turns in the solenoid of length l and area of cross-
section a. When a current I is passed through the solenoid the magnetic flux density B in the solenoid is
B = 0 nI, where n is the number of turns per unit length of the solenoid
N
Now, n=
l
N
B = 0 I
l
This fields acts parallel to the axis and perpendicular to the face area of the solenoid.
The magnetic flux linked with the whole solenoid is
= NBA cos 0
N
= N . 0 I 1 ( = 0)
l
0 N 2 I
=
l
The self inductance L of the coil is given by
0 N2 I N2
L= = . = 0
I l I l

EVERGREEN
SERIES
SECTION-B
Answer 8. Slit Screen
L2
(a) In the fig. is shown an experimental arrangement to get a L1 P

diffraction pattern of a single slit. The image of the slit A y
obtained on the screen is not a point one but is spread. a C
The diffraction pattern obtained consists of a central N O
B
maxima flamked by minima and secondary maxima of
diminishing intensity is as shown in the fig. The graph Plane
Wavefront D
between and intensity is as shown.
Width of the central maxima : As seen from the fig, the path difference between the disturbance from the two
part of the same wavefront is = a sin
The point P will be a minima, if
a sin =

sin =
a

= (since is small sin = )
a
2
Angular width of the maxima = 2 = .D
a
Intensity
2 /a /a 0 /a 2 /a
Angle
(b) We know that
2
Imax a + a2
= 1 ,
Imin a1 a2
where a1 and a2 are the amplitude of the light from the two sources.
25 a1 + a2 2
=
9 a1 a2
a1 + a2 5
a1 a2 = 3
3a1 + 3a2 = 5a1 5a2
8a2 = 2a4
a1
=4
a2
Answer 9.
(a) In the fig., S1 and S2 are the two coherent sources a distance apart.
P is a point at a distance x from the centre O, where the waves from the two sources reach in phase. D is the
distance between the source and the screen. Point P has an angular height Q.Path difference between the
disturbances reaching the point P, p = S2P S1P.
p = S1 L (S1L S2P)
S2 L
Now = sin = tan (Since is small sin = tan )
d
x
p = d tan = d . P
D S1
As the position of the point P changes, x changes and hence p changes. x
Maxima : The point P will be point of maximum intensity.
If p = n, where n = 0, 1, 2, ... O
d Screen
xn D
or d = n L
D
D
xn = n
d S2

EVERGREEN
SERIES
If x1, x2 ... xn are the positions first, second and nth bright fringe, then
D
x1 =
d
D
x 2 = 2
d
D
xn 1 = (n 1)
d
D
xn = n
d
Fringe width is the distance between the centres of the two consecutive maxima.
D
= xn xn 1 = n (n 1)
d
D
lengths =
d
Fringe width dark fringes : P will at a dark fringe if

p = (2n 1)
2
d
or xn = (2n 1)
D 2
D
x n = (2n 1) , where n = 1, 2, ...
2 d
The first, second, ... (n 1) and nth dark fringes will be at distances
D
x1 =
2 d
D
x2 = 3
2 d
D
xn 1 = (2n 3)
2 d
D
x n = (2n 1)
2 d
D D
dark = (2n 1) (2n 3)
2 d 2 d
D
= [2n 1 2n + 3]
2 d
D
= = bright
d
Dark and bright fringes have the same width.
(b) Here, i p = 53, r2 = ?, = ?
Since the reflected light is completely polarised, the refracted and reflected lights are mutually perpendicular.
ip + r = 90
r = 90 ip = 90 53 = 37
Now, = tan ip = tan 53 = 1.327
Answer 10.
(a) Chromatic aberration of a lens is the failure of the lens to bring the rays of different colours to focus at the
same. It is measured by the difference (fr fv), where fr and fv are the focal lengths of the lens corresponding to
red and violet colour. To get red of chromatic aberration a convex and concave lens of suitable focal lengths and
of suitable dispersive powers are combined. Let f1 and f2 be their focal lengths and 1 and 2 the dispersive
powers of the material of the two lenses.
Now, for a lens according to lens makers formula
1 1 1
= ( 1)
f 1
R R 2
1 1 1
= , where f is the focal length of the lens ... (i)
R1 R 2 ( 1) f

EVERGREEN
SERIES
If fv , fr are the focal lengths, for the violet and red colours respectively and v and r the corresponding refractive
indices, then
1 1
= (v 1) . ... (ii)
fv f1
where f1 is the mean focal length of the lens
1 1
and = (r 1) ... (iii)
fr f1
Similarly, for the second lens of mean focal length f2, then
1 1
= (v 1) ... (iv)
fv f2
1 1
= ( r 1) ... (v)
fr f2
If Fv and Fr denote the focal length of the lens combination for violet and red colours respectively, then
1 1 1
= +
Fv fv f v
1 1 1
and +
Fr = f r f r
If the combination is acromatic then Fv = Fr
1 1 1 1
+ = +
fv f v fr f r
1 1 1 1
(v 1) + (v 1) = ( r 1) + (r 1)
f1 f2 f1 f2
1 1
or (v 1 r + 1) f + (v r ) =0
1 f2
1 2
+
f1 f 2 = 0 which is the required condition for acromatism
1
= 2 , ve sign indicates that one of the lenses must be concave.
f1 f2
(b) The completed ray diagram by which the image of the distant object is A
formed is as shown. AB is the image of the object AB formed by
B
reflection and is between F and C. The intensity of the image will be P
B C
reduced if the lower half of reflecting surface is blackened. However, the A
position of the image will remain the same.
Answer 11.
(a) The course of rays by which the image of a nearby object is formed is as shown in the fig.
A
Convex lens
A
F
B F B O
A simple microscope
AB is the virtual image of the object AB formed by objective lens formed at the least distance of distinct vision.
Magnifying power of a simple microscope is defined as the ratio of the angle subtended by the image to the
angle subtended by the object when both are the distance of distinct vision.
AB
tan OB OB D
M = = = = = , where D is the distance of distinct vision.
tan AB OB u
OB
If f is the focal length of the lens, then
OB = u
v =D
EVERGREEN
SERIES
1 1 1
Applying =
v u f
1 1 1
+ =
D u f
D D
1 + = (where v = D)
u f
D D
= 1 +
u f
D
or M = 1 +
f
3 4
(b) Here, R1 = 10 cm, R2 = 30 cm, 2 = , 1 =
2 3
According to lens makers formula
1 (2 1 ) 1 1
=
R R
f 1 1 2
3 4

1 2 3 1 1 1 2
= + =
f 4 10 30 8 30
3
1 1
=
f 120
f = 120 cm
SECTION-C
Answer 12.
(a) Work function of metal X = 2eV
Work function of metal Y = 5eV
= 400 109 = 4 107 m
c
Energy associated with this wavelength in eV = h

6.62 1034 3 108 6.62 3
= = = 3.2 eV
7
4 10 1.6 10 19 4 1.6
This energy is less than the work function of Y but more than the work function of X. Metal A will emit photoelectrons.
(b) Let w 0 = work function of a photosensitive material
v = frequency of the incident
v = velocity of the emitted electron
when a photon of energy hv is incident on the photosensitive material it is completely absorbed by the electron.
The energy of the incident is used as follow :
(i) A part of it is used in supplying the energy equal to 0.
1
(ii) The balance of energy, if any is given to the electron in the form of K.E. = mv2
2
1
h = 0 + mv2 ... (i)
2
If v0 is the threshold frequency, then 0 = h0
1
and h = h0 + mv2 ... (ii)
2
If VS is the stopping potential i.e., the ve potential of the anode for which K.E. = 0.
1
mv2 = eVS
2
The above equation then reduces to
h = h0 + eVS ... (iii)
which is Einsteins equation for photoelectric effect.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
1 1
(1) From this equation h = h0 + mv2, it is clearly that if < 0, mv2 will be ve which is not possible.
2 2
This implies that electron will not be emitted.
(2) Since 0 is fixed for the given surface, it is clear that as increases, K.E. of the ejected electron will also
increase and hence stopping potential will also increase. There will be no effect on photoelectric current.
(3) When the intensity of incident light increases, the number of incident photons per sec also increases. Since
one electron is ejected by one photoelectrons, the number of ejected electron per sec and hence photoelectric
current increases. There will be no effect on the stopping potential because energy of the incident photon
remains the same.
Answer 13.
(a) When the electron revolves around the nucleus in the hydrogen atom the electrostatic force between the
electron and the nucleus supplies the necessary centripetal force.
2

mv 2 = 1 . e e = 1 e ... (i)
r 40 r 2 40 r 2
Also, according to quantisation of angular momentum
h
mvr = n ... (ii)
2
nh
or v =
2mr v
Putting this value of v in (i), we have m
2 2 2
m n h
. 2 2 2 = 1 . e , which gives r
r 4 m r 40 r 2
e
0 . n2 h2
r =
me2
If r = rn , the radius of the nth orbit
0 . n2 h2
rn = ... (iii)
me 2
Also, from equation (i)
1 e2
mv2 = .
40 rn
1 1 e2
K.E. = mvn2 = . in the nth orbit
2 40 2rn
1 e2
Potential energy = .
40 rn
1 e2 1 e2 1 e2
En = K.E. + P.E. = . . = .
40 rn 40 2rn 40 2rn
Putting the value of rn from (iii) in this equation, we get
1 e2 me 2
En = 8
0 0 h 2 n 2
me2
En =
802 h2 n2
which gives us the energy of the electron in the nth orbit. It is negative.
(b) The wavelength of emitted spectral line will be minimum if the energy emitted is maximum. Clearly, the maximum
energy will be emitted when the electron jumps from the outer orbit to the innermost orbit i.e., for which
nf = 1, and ni =
We know that
1 1 1
= R 2
min
n f
n 2f 1
min = =
R R
1 1 1000
= 7 m= 107 1010 = = 911.6
1.097 10 1.097 1.097
EVERGREEN
SERIES
Answer 14.
(a) Laws of radioactivity :
(1) Radioactivity is a nuclear phenomenon. It does not depend upon the physical and chemical condition.
(2) It is a spontaneous phenomenon . Which atom disintegrates is a matter of chance.
(3) During disintegration of the atoms the substance emits and but not both.
(4) The radioactivity i.e., number of atoms disintegrating per sec at any instant depends upon the number of
atoms present at that instant.
If N is the number of undecayed at any time t and dN is the number of atoms that decay in a further small dt,
then
dN
N
dt
dN
or = N, where is a constant called the radioactive decay constant whose
dt
value depends upon the nature of the radioactive substance
dN
or = dt
N
N t
dN
N
= dt
N0 0
[log N ]N
N
= t
0
loge N = t
N0
N = N0 et
(b) Half-life of a radioactive substance is defined as the time in which the number of atoms of radioactive substance
is reduced to half. It is denoted by T.
N0
If t = T, N =
2
N0
= N0eT
2
lne 2 = lneT
T = 0.693
0.693
T =

Answer 15.
(a) The labelled diagram of a half wave rectifier is as shown
D
+
+
RL
Diode
Input ~
Load resistance Output

A half wave rectifier cuts off ve half of the input signal only. Its input and output wave are as below :
Clearly, the output is not continuous
Output
Input
(b) We can get an OR gate by using a combination of NAND gates only.

Or
(c) NOT gate can be obtained by using only NAND gates when the two inputs of a NAND gate are joined.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
A
A
Y=A.B= A+ B
B B
A.B = A + B = A + B (OR gate)

Truth table
A B A B A .B A .B
0 0 1 1 1 0
0 1 1 0 0 1
1 0 0 1 0 1
1 1 0 0 0 1
If consider A, B and A . B , they constitute an OR gate.

EVERGREEN
SERIES

PART-I
Answer 1.
1
(A) (i) (a) Initial energy U =CV 2 = U
2
V
Common potential =
2
2
1 V 1
Energy in each capacitor = .C = .U
2 2 4
(ii) (c) 2
R = n R = 9R.
(iii) (a) At P, the magnetic field due to current carrying conductor and earths field will be in the same direction
whereas at Q, they are in opposite directions.
(iv) (c) The distance through which the object appears to be raised is
d 1 1
d

=d 1 = d

(v) (b) Since the wavelength emitted are in the inverse ratio of the energy.
1
x= or xy = 1
y
(B) (i) Electric dipole moments of a dipole is the Torque acting on the dipole when it is placed at right angles to
an electric field of unit intensity. Its unit is Cm.
l
(ii) R= . . Since R and l are same
a

= constant
a
Since for manganin is more, it must be thicker also.
r
(iii) These three resistances are in parallel, their combined resistance is.
3
(iv) The p.d. between the two points is said to be 1V, if 1 joule of work is done in moving a charge of
1 coulomb from one point to the other.

0 dl r
(v) d B = 4 I , where the letters have their usual meaning.
r3
Ig S 2 2 1
(vi) = = = =
I G + S 50 + 2 52 26
1 L
(vii) Q= .
R C
It can be increased by (i) increasing L (ii) decreasing C and decreasing R.
(viii) For an achromatic combination
w1 w2
+ =0
f1 f2
w1 f1
=
w2 f2
For combination to be convex, the focal length of the convex lens must be less than the concave lens and
to satisfy the above relation, the convex lens must be of crown glass, since its dispersive power is less.
(ix) For correcting short-sightedness, the concave lens is used.
(x) A displacement current is the current that flows through a capacitor as long as varying potential difference
is applied across its ends. Yes, it is equal to the conduction current.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
(xi) The diffraction pattern of a single slit is as shown in the fig. below :
0
3 2 2 3
a a a a a a
1.6
(xii) When the frequency is halved, it will be 0 = 0.8 0 which is less than the threshold frequency.
2
Hence, photoelectrons will not be emitted.
(xiii) Ci and rutherford.
1 Ci = 3.7 104 rfd
13.6
(xiv) In the second excited state i.e., for n = 3, energy of the electron = = 1.51 eV
9
Ionisation potential = 1.51 V
(xv) NAND gate. It is an AND gate followed by a NOT gate.
PART-II
SECTION-A
Answer 2.
(a) In the fig. is shown an electric dipole formed by two charges q and q E1 Y
charges placed at the point A and B separated by a distance 2a, P is a point
on the equatorial line lying at a distance r from the centre of the dipole. Then

AP = BP = a2 + r 2 . L P

Then electric intensity E1 and E2 at the point P due to + q and q charges is
given by a2 + r 2 a2 + r 2
r
E2
1 q
E1 = along BP and
40 a + r 2
2 A B
q a X a +q
1 q
E2 = along PA
40 a + r 2
2
Clearly, E1 = E2 in magnitude, though directions are different. Each of these electric intensity can be resolved
into two rectangular components as shown in the fig.
The components of E1 and E2 are :
(i) E1 cos along PL and E1 sin along PY and (ii) E2 cos along PL and E2 sin along YP. The components
along the y-direction being equal and opposite cancel each other whereas components along PL add up.
E = E1 cos + E2 cos = 2E1cos (_ E1 = E2)
1 q a
=2 . 2 2 .
40 (r + l ) r 2 + l 2
1 p
= along PL
40 (r 2 + l 2 )3/ 2
i.e., opposite to the direction of dipole axis.
(b) Here, q = 17.7 106C, area A = 200 m2,
r = 20 102 m, E = ?
17.7 106
= C m2
200
17.7 106 1 4
E= =
= 10 = 5 103 Vm1
2 0 2 200 8.85 10 12 2

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Answer 3.
(a) (i) If C be the capacity of X, then the capacity of Y is 5C.
Their combined capacity is
5C C 5
C = 5C + C = 6 C
Charge through the circuit is
5
Q = CV = C 12 = 10 C
6
10 C
Potential difference across the plates of X = = 10 V
C
10 C
and Potential difference across the plates of Y = =2V
5C
(ii) If U1 and U2 are the electrostatic energies stored in them, then
1 1
U1 =CV2 = C 100 = 50 J
2 2
1
U2 = 5C 4 = 10 J
2
U1 50 J
= 10 J = 5
U2
(b) Resistivity of the material of a conductor is defined as the resistance of a conductor of length 1 m and having an
area of cross-section 1 m2 of that material.
We know that
I = naevd ... (i)
where vd is the drift velocity of the electrons.
Ee V e
Also, vd = = . ... (ii)
m l m
where l is the length of the conductor and V the potential difference applied across its ends and the relaxation
time.
Putting this value of vd in (i), we get
V
I = nae2 .
ml
V ml
=
I n a e2
V l
But =R=
I a
l ml
=
a n a e2
ml
= which is required relation.
n a e2
Answer 4.
(a) (i) Applying the colour code of resistance, its resistance is 61 103 and the tolerance is 10%.
(ii) The internal resistance of a cell depends upon : A R C R D
(1) Nature of the electolyte,
(2) Normality of the electron, R R R
(3) Distance between the electrodes. B

F E
(b) The distribution of current is as shown in the fig.
Breaking the circuit at E leaves the potential at E unaltered. Thus, the resistance R between CE is ineffective.
The three resistances in the upper arm and lower arm are in series and the two are then in parallel.
3R and 3R resistances are in parallel.
3R
Effective resistance = .
2

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Answer 5.
(a) Here, l = 10 m, emf of the standard cell = 1.018 V
Balancing length = 850 cm
1.018
Potential gradient = V cm1 = 1.2 103 V cm1
850
Potential difference across the entire length of the potentiometer wire
= 1.2 103 1000 = 1.2 V
The maximum emf that can be measured is 1.2 V
(b) The hysteresis loop of a material is as shown in the fig. In the hysteresis
loop is obtained for a given sample by taking it through a cycle of B
magnetisation. A
B
Here, OB = retentivity
or OC = coercivity of the material. C
This helps us to select a suitable material. Permanent magnet are usually O A H
made of steel because, in the hysteresis loop, their coercivity is large i.e., D
E
a large reverse field has to be applied to demagnetise them. However, when
we require a strong magnet, though for a small, we use soft iron which
has a high retentivity. Retentivity of iron is more than that of steel.
Answer 6.
(a) To find the magnetic field at the centre of a coil carrying a current I. To find the magnetic field at the centre of
the coil, divide the whole coil into a large number of current elements. For all these elements, is equal to 90
and each element is at the same distance r from the centre. The magnetic field at the centre dB is given by
0 I dl I dl
dB = sin = 0 2 (_ sin 90 = 1)
4 r 2 4 r
0 I dl idl
dB = outwards
4 r 2
Total magnetic field at the centre due to the whole circular coil is e r
2 r 0 I 2r 0 I
0 Idl . . 2r
B= 4 r 2
= . [l ]
4 r 2 0
=
4 r 2
0
I
B= 0
2r
If there are n turns in the coil nI
B= 0
2r
(b) The time constant of an LR circuit is defined as the time in which the current in LR circuit grows to 0.632 of its
maximum value.
Dimensions of LC :
1
We know that n =
2 LC
1
LC = n = T i.e., time.
Answer 7.
(a) Power in an a.c. circuit is defined as the average rate at which energy is consumed in the circuit. Mathematically,
it is given by
T
1
Pav = EI dt ,
T
0
where E and I are the instantaneous value of voltage and current and is given by
E = E0 sin t
I = E0 sin (t + ), where is the phase difference between them
T
1
Pav =
T E 0 sin t I0 sin (t + ) dt
0

EVERGREEN
SERIES
T
E 0I0 1
2 T
= 2 sin t sin (t + ) dt
0
T
E 0 I0 1
= 2 T [sin (t + t + ) sin ] dt
0
T T
E 0 I0 1 1 E0 I0
= 2 T [sin (2t + ) dt
T 2 sin dt
0 0
T
E 0 I0 (cos 2t + ) 1 E 0 I0
= + [cos ]T0
T 2 2 0 T 2
E 0 I0 E I
= [cos cos ] + 0 0 cos [T 0]
2 2T 2T
1 E 0I0
= T cos
T 2
E I
= 0 . 0 cos
2 2
Pav = Ev Iv cos which is the required expression.
dB
(b) In case (i), since the flux is increasing at the rate , therefore, the induced emf will send current in the
dt
anticlockwise direction.
Total area = r12 + r22
= (r12 + r22 )
dB
e = [r12 + r22 ]
dt
and total resistance = (2r1 + 2r2)
R = 2(r1 + r2)
e (r12 + r22 ) d B
Induced current = =
R 2(r1 + r2 ) dt
1 ( r12 + r22 ) d B
=
2 (r1 + r2 ) dt
In case (ii), effective area = (r12 r22 )
Induced emf e = (r12 r22 ) d B

dt
Effective resistance = 2 (r1 + r2)
(r12 r22 ) d B
I =
2(r1 + r2 ) dt
r12 r22 d B
=
2(r1 + r2 ) dt
SECTION-B
Answer 8.
(a) The intensity of light at any point, where the disturbances from the two coherent sources have a phase
difference of .
I = I1 + I2 + 2 I1I2 cos ... (i)
At a maxima, =0
I max = I1 + I2 + 2 I1I2 ... (ii)
EVERGREEN
SERIES
and at a minima, the two waves reach out of phase

i.e., = 180, cos = 1
Imin = I1 + I2 2 I1I2
Imax + Imin = 2I1 + 2I2 = 2(I1 + I2)
Imax Imin = 4 I1I2
Imax Imin 4 I1I2 2 I1I2

= = ... (iii)
Imax + Imin 2(I1 + I2 ) I1 + I2
I1
Further = , I1 = I2
I2
Putting this value of I1 in (iii), we get
Imax Imin 2 I2 I2 2I2 2
= = =
Imax + Imin (I2 + I2 ) I2 (1 + ) 1 +
(b) When unpolarised light passes through a polaroid A, then the intensity of the transmitted light is reduced to
I0
and it is polarised. The polarised light is incident on the polaroid B inclined at an angle with A. Therefore,
2
the intensity I of this light through it is
I0 I 1 I
I= cos2 45 = 0 . 2
= 0
2 2 ( 2) 4
Answer 9.
(a) Huygens principle states that :
1. Every point on a wavefront is a source of secondary wavelets which travel with the same speed as the
original wave.
2. The locus of all points in the medium where these wavelets reach is the position of secondary wavefront.
The shape of the emerging wavefronts in different cases is as shown below :
Ray
ray
S ray S ray
F
wavefront
Wavefront
are spherical Convex lens Plane wavefront Sun light focussed on a convex lens
(b) Light is a transverse wave. This can be shown with the Unpolarised
help of this simple experiment. Figure shows an light Polariser
unpolarised light beam incident on the first polarising E0
Analyser
sheet, called the polariser where the transmission axis
is indicated by the straight line on the polariser. E0 cos
Transmission
axis Polarised
light
The polariser can be a thin sheet of tourmaline (a complex boro-silicate). The light, which is passing through
this sheet, is polarised vertically as shown, where the transmitted electric vector is E 0. A second polarising
sheet called the analyser, intercepts this beam with its transmission axis at an angle to the axis of the polariser.
As the axis of the analyser is rotated slowly, the intensity of light received beyond it goes on decreasing.
When the transmitting axis of the analyser becomes perpendicular to the transmission axis of the polariser, no
beam is obtained beyond the analyser. This means that the analyser has further polarised of the beam coming
from the polariser. Since only transverse waves can be polarised, therefore, this shows that light waves are
transverse in nature.
Answer 10.
(a) In the fig. ABC is a principal section of the prism. PQ is a ray of light is incident on the face AB at an angle i.
It is refracted at an angle r1 and finally emerges along PS at an angle e with the normal, is the angle of
deviation through which the incident ray is deviated.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
In quadrilateral AQOR A
Angle of Prism
A + AQO + QOR + ORA = 360
L
A + 90 + QOR+ 90 = 360
D Angle of Deviation
QOR + A = 180 ... (i) N N
Q R
Also, QOR + r1 + r2 = 180 ... (ii) i de nt i r1 r2 e
Em
e
I nc ay Ra rge n
From (i) and (ii), we get R y t
P O N
r1
A = r1 + r2 ... (iii)
B C
In QDR, QD is produced
= DQR + DRQ
= i r1 + e r2
= 1 + e (r1 + r2) = i + e A
A+ = i + e
Minimum deviation :
= i + e A
= ( i e )2 + 2 ie A
Clearly, deviation will be minimum ( i e )2 is minimum
i.e., i e =0
i =e
A + min = i + i
A + min
i=
2
where i and e are equal r1 = r2 = r (say), then
A
2r = A or r =
2
A + min
sin
sin i 2
= .
sin r A
sin
2
(b) A = 30
i = 60
Let r1 be the angle of refraction when the ray suffers refraction, then
sin i A
= 1.5 ( = 1.5 for the glass prism)
sin r1 30
sin 60 0.707
= 1.5, sin r = = 0.47
sin r 1.5 r1
r 1 = 30
B C
Also, r1 + r2 = 30
r 2 = 30 r1 = 30 30 0
i.e., the ray is incident almost normally. Thus, emergent ray is incident normally and will be emerge undeviated.
Answer 11.
(a) The course of rays by which the image is formed by an Astronomical telescope is as shown in the fig.
Objective
From objective at
Eye piece

A C
c
From
fo fe
f0
Magnifying power =
,
fe
where f0 and fe are the focal lengths of the objective and eyepiece respectively.
EVERGREEN
SERIES
(b) The first spherical surface forms the image of the distant object at the point I, in the absence of second
surface. For the second surface I serves as a virtual object giving rise to a real image.
O I
I
For the refraction at the first surface

3
u = , R1 = + 20 cm, 2 = , =1
2 1
Since refraction is from rarer to denser medium
1 ( 1)
+ =
u v R
1 1.5 1.5 1 1
+ = =
v 20 40
v = + 60 cm
The image I is at a distance 60 40 = 20 cm from the second spherical surface.
For the second surface
u = 20, R = 20 cm, = 1.5, v = ?
Since the refraction takes place from the denser to rarer medium
1 1
+ =
u v R
1.5 1 0.5 1
+ = =
20 v 20 40
1 1 1.5 4
= + =
v 40 20 40
v = 10 cm
Thus, the final image will be formed at a distance of 10 cm from the pole of the second surface.
Answer 12.
(a) (i) Since the slope of the graph between v and stopping potential represents the ratio h , it will be the same
e
for both of them because both h and e are constant.
(ii) Further it can be seen from the graph that the work function is less for the metal M1, it requires less
energy for starting the photoelectric effect and, therefore, more energy will be available to the electrons
emitted by the metal M1.
(b) The required graph is as shown in the fig.
Answer 13. p
(a) = 275 nm = 275 109 m
Energy possessed by this photon in eV is
hc 6.6 1034 3 108
E= = eV
275 109 1.6 1019
6.6 3
= 100 = 4.5 eV
275 1.6
Clearly, the transition from 0 eV to 4.5 eV = 4.5 eV will be responsible for the emission of this photon.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
(b) Excitation potential means the potential through which the electron must fall and gain energy to be excited
from one energy level to the other. If E1 is the energy in a lower level and E2 in the higher level, the electron
must be given energy = E2 E1 so that it is a excited to higher level. The potential required for this purpose is
called the excitation potential.
Ionisation potential is the potential required for ionising the atom.
For this the electron has to be excited from the given to the level for n = i.e., energy is zero.
The energy of the hydrogen atom in any state is
13.6
En =
n2
13.6
E1 = = 13.6 eV
1
13.6
Energy in the second orbit (n = 2) = = 3.4 eV
4
13.6
Energy in the third orbit = = 1.51 eV
9
Energy required by the electron = 1.51 ( 3.4)
= 1.51 + 3.4 = 1.9 eV
Excitation potential = 1.9 V
and ionisation potential in the third orbit = 1.5 V
Answer 14.
(a) (i) All radioactive substances emit the radiations spontaneously when the atoms of the substance
disintegrate.
The radioactivity of a substance is defined as the rate at which the atoms disintegrate. If N is the number
dN
of atoms present, then is called the radioactivity of the substance. The radioactivity depends upon :
dt
1. No. of atoms present at any instant of time.
2. Nature of the radioactive substance. A
Radioactivity decreases as the number of atoms in the substance Activity

decreases.
The required graph is given below :
time
time
(ii) Curie : It is a unit of activity. It is the activity of 1 g of radium, which disintegrates at the rate of
3.7 1010 distintegrations per sec.
1 Ci = 3.7 1010 Bq
(b) Half life is the time in which the number of radioactive substance is reduced to half. If N is the number of
atoms left behind after n half lives, then
n 4
N 1 1 1
= = =
N0 2 2 16
1
% of the original atoms left behind = 100 = 6.25%
16
Answer 15.
(a) The Boolean expression for the given combination
Y= A . B = A + B = A + B
Which is the Boolean expression for the OR gate.
The truth table is written as
A B A B A.B
0 0 1 1 0
0 1 1 0 1
1 0 0 1 1
1 1 0 0 1
Which is the same as the truth table for OR gate.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
(b) The circuit diagram of a transistor working as an oscillator.

In the fig. is shown the circuit diagram of an transistor being used as an oscillator. Essential part of the LC as
which one excited continuous to oscillate. However, due to loss of energy in the coil on account of the
resistance of the inductor, the oscillation are damped. To have undamped oscillation, the loss of energy must
be nutralised. It is done with the help of the feedback coil L which is inductively coupled to the coil L.
L
Feedback coil
npn
transistor
Tank circuit L
***

EVERGREEN
SERIES
PART-I
Answer 1.
(A) (i) (b) If r is the radius of each smaller drop and R that of the bigger drop, then
4 3
R = 1000 4 r 3 , R = 10r
3 3
i.e., capacity becomes 10 times. Therefore, potential V
1000q
V = = 100 V, 100 times that of each smaller drop.
10r
(ii) (d) Only current remains constant.
1 1
(iii) (a) [ 0 n I] = 0 n I
2 2
(iv) (b) Refractive index of the first medium w.r.t. second
2.4 108
=
= 1.2
2 108
1 1 5
Now, sin C = = =
1.2 6
5
C = sin1
6
(v) (a) The emission of largest energy corresponds to the transition from n2 to n1, i.e., II.
(B) (i) For balanced electron Ee = mg
mg 9.1 1031 9.8

E= = = 5.57 101 Vm1.
e 1.6 1019
(ii) When the wire is doubled upon itself, its length is halved and area of cross-section doubled.
R
The new resistance =
4
(iii) The graph is as shown in the fig.

temperature
Temperature dependence of the resistivity of a semiconductor with temperature.

(iv) Drift velocity increases with the rise of temperature.
(v) 1T = 104 Oersted
(vi) There is no magnetic field at the centre O due to radial parts of the conductor.
0 (2)
The magnetic field at O, due to circular part =
4 r 360
0
=
2r 360
(vii) The inductance offers a resistance L = XL but consumes no power. A resistor consume power and is
hence no economical.
4 1 4
(viii) tan ip = , i = tan = 1.3333
3 p 3
i p = 53

EVERGREEN
SERIES
(ix) When the thin transparent film is inserted the whole interference pattern shifts towards the side in which
the thin sheet is inserted.
(x) I = I0 cos2
(xi) For diffraction to be take place, the size of the obstacle must be of the order of the wavelength of light.
Since the wavelength of light is extremely small the size of the obstacle must also be small. It is quite
difficult to have such objects.
(xii) The graph will be as shown in the fig.
K.E.
v0
v
(xiii) The -particles emitted during decay have a large kinetic energy. This kinetic energy is also equivalent
to some mass. Hence, the mass increases.
(xiv) The control rods in a nuclear reactor control the rate at which fission proceeds. The rods of cadmium
absorb the neutrons if the reaction proceeds faster.
(xv) Transconductance is defined as the ratio of change in the output current to the change in the input
voltage keeping VC = constant. It is denoted by gm. It has mho as unit.
PART-II
SECTION-A
Answer 2.
(a) Work has to be done always to charge a capacitor. This is because charge on the capacitor gradually rises
from 0 to Q0. At any stage during charges there is some charge and potential of the capacitor. Work has to be
done against the force between the charge on the capacitor and charge being brought on to the capacitor. Let
V be the potential at any instant and C the capacity of the capacitor, then
Q
V=
C
Small amount of work done in further depositing a small amount of charge, then
Q
dW = VdQ = dQ
C
Total work done in charging the capacitor
Q0 Q
Q 1 2 0
W= dQ = Q
C C 2 0
0
1 2
W= Q0
2C
Also, Q0 = CV0
1 2 2 1
W= C V0 = CV02
2C 2
(b) Here, the series combination 200 pf 200 pf is in parallel with 100 pf. The net capacity is then in series with
100 pf capacitor.
Net capacity of 200 pf 200 pf series combination
200 200
= = 100 pf
400
This is series with 200 pf capacitor.
100 200 200
Equivalent capacity = 200 + 100 = pf
3
200
Charge in the circuit = 1012 300 = 20 109 C
3
Since the charge divides itself in the ratio of the capacitor charge through 100 pf capacitor
100
= 20 109 = 10 109 C
200

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Q 10 109
Voltage across 100 pf capacitor = =
C 100 1012
= 10 10 = 100 volt.
10 109
Voltage across each of the capacitor of 200 pf = = 50 V
200 1012
20 109
Voltage across 100 pf (lower) = = 200 V
100 1012
Answer 3.
G mp mp
(a) Gravitational force betwen the two protons =
r2
6.67 10 11 1.67 1.67 10 54
FG = N
r2
and Fe, the electrostatic force between the two protons (of repulsion)
1 q1q2
Fe =
40 r 2
9 109 1.6 10 19 1.6 10 19
=
r2
Fe 9 109 1.6 1.6 1038 r 2
= 2
FG r 6.67 1.67 1.67 1054 1011
9 1.6 1.6
= 1036
6.67 1.67 1.67
Fe
36
FG = 1.238 10
Clearly, FG <<< Fe and cannot balance the electrostatic force. There must be some other force.
(b) We know that
l
r=
a
Since is constant
l
r where D is the diameter of the wire.
D2
r1
1 2 3
r1 : r2 : r3 : : : : r2
9 4 1
r1 : r2 : r3 : : 4 : 18 : 108 r3
Since the current divides itself in the inverse ratio of the resistances.
1 1 1
I1 : I2 : I3 : : : :
4 18 108
I1 : I2 : I3 : : 27 : 6 : 1
Answer 4.
(a) Mixed grouping of cells is adopted, when the total internal resistance is
comparable with the load resistance. In this grouping all the cells cell n
(says N) are divided into rows (say m) will each row containing n cells.
All the cells in one row are in series but the rows themselves are in parallel.
Clearly, N = mn. Let r be the internal resistance of each cell and E its emf.
Further R be the load resistance as shown in the arrangement of cells.
R
The emf of the cells in a single row = nE and internal resistance of all the cells in one row = nr
Since the rows in parallel, the total emf = emf of a single row = nE
nr
Total internal resistance =
m
nr
Total circuit resistance = +R
m
EVERGREEN
SERIES
nE NE
Current in the circuit, I= m=
nr + mR nr + mR
Now, I to be maximum nR + mR must be minimum.
Now, nr + mR = ( nr mR )2 + 2 mnRr
nr + mR will be minimum if
nr mR = 0
or nr = mR
nr
R= = total internal resistance
m
NE NE
Imax = =
2nr 2mR
I 2 Rt V 2t
(b) We know H= =
4.2 4.2R
Clearly, if I is constant H R
1
and if V is constant V
R
Heat produced in 5 resistor = 20 calories
Since the combination of 2 and 3 = 5 is in parallel with 5 .
Total heat produced in 2 and 3 combination = 20 calories
2
Heat produced in 3 resistance = 20 = 8 calories
5
Answer 5. A
(a) Consider a wire of uniform area of cross-section a length L. A cell is
connected with the wire and sends a current through it. If a current I flows
through the wire, then, potential difference across the length of the wire
A
= IR B
L V
V= IR = I
a
V I
Fall of potential across a unit length e = =
L a
If I and are constant and wire is of uniform area of cross-section
V L
i.e., Fall of potential across a wire of uniform area of cross-section is proportional to the length.
(b) Declination at a place is defined as the angle between the geographic meridian and
GM
magnetic meridian at that place. It is expressed W or E. If the position of the MM
magnetic meridian is known, that of geographic can be determined.
Since the declination is 18 W, it means that magnetic meridian is 18W of 18
geographic meridian. To go towards east it must steer in a direction 18 + 90 = 108 W E
with the direction of magnetic meridian.
Answer 6. S
(a) A toroid is a long solenoid shaped in the form of a ring is called a torodial. Let n be
P
the number of turns per unit length of the toroid and I be the current passed through
it as shown. The magnetic lines of force inside the toroid are in the form of
concentric circles. The magnetic field at any point of the circular path is along the r
circular path.

B and dl are in the same direction.

B . dl = B dl = B 2r F
... (i)
Also, by amperes circuital law
B. dl = 0 I ... (ii)
B 2r = 0 . 2r nI ... (iii)
From (i) and (iii), we have
B = 0 nI

EVERGREEN
SERIES
(b) When a voltmeter is connected in series with a circuit in which the ammeter is connected in parallel, nothing
is likely to happen to either the voltmeter or the ammeter. This is so because the voltmeter has a high resistance
and hence the circuit resistance will become large and the current too small to cause any damage.
Answer 7.
(a) Let A.C. be applied across a series combination of a resistor R and inductance L. Let I be the instantaneous
dI
current and the rate of change of current, then L
dt R
Voltage across the resistance = IR

dI
Voltage across the inductor = L
dt V
If E is the instantaneous emf, then
dI
EL = IR
dt
dI
E = IR + L ... (i)
dt
dI
or E0 sin t = IR + L
dt
Let I = I0 sin (t + )
dI
Then = I0 cos (t + )
dt
dI
Putting this value of I and in (i), we get
dt
E = I0R sin (t ) + LI0 cos (t )
E = I0[R sin (t ) + L cos (t )] ... (ii)
Put R = A cos ... (iii)
L = A sin ... (iv)
The relation (i) reduces to
E = I0 [A cos sin (t ) + A sin cos (t )]
E0 sin t = AI0 sin (t + ) = AI0 sin t,
E0 = AI0
To find A and
Squaring (iii) and (iv) t, we have
L22 + R2 = A2 or A = L2 2 + R 2
Dividing (iv) and (iii)
L 1 L
tan = , = tan
R R
I= L2 2 + R 2
E E0
I0 = = A C
A L + R2
2 2
VL = IL
B
E0 O
I= sin(t ) VR = IR
L2 2 + R 2
Impedance = L2 2 + R 2
(b) r = 10 cm = 0.1 m, B = 100 T,
t = 0.1 second
Here, A = (0.1)2 m2 = 3.142 102 m2
2 0.1 0.1
Length of the side of the square = =
4 2
2
0.1 2 2 10 cm
Area of the square = = m = 2.47 102 m2
2 200
Change in flux = (3.142 2.468) 102
= 1.674 102 100 Wb = 1.674 Wb
1.674 Wb
Induced emf = = 16.74 V
0.1s
EVERGREEN
SERIES
SECTION-B
Answer 8.
(a) Polarisation by reflection : In the fig. is shown an unpolarised ray of light incident
on a glass slabe. A part of the light is reflected and a part is refracted. It is found
i r
the reflected beam is partially plane polarised whereas the transmitted beam is also
partially polarised. If we place a polaroid in the path of reflected ray, the intensity A B
of light transmitted through the polarised decreases from a maximum to a minimum
but is never zero. If the angle of incidence is varied, the angle, the degree of
polarisation also changes. For a certain angle of incidence called the polarising C D
angle, the reflected ray is fully polarised.
It is found that the parallel components reflect more strongly than the other components and the result is a
partially plane polarised light. The refractive index and angle of polarisation are related as
= tan ip
(b) Here, let D be the distance between the screen and the slits, then distance in the second case is D + 5 102 m.
If is the new fringe width and the previous width, then
= + 3 105 m
Here, d = 103 m, = ?
We know that
D
=
d
D
=
d
D
+ 3 105 = ... (i)
d
D
= ... (ii)
d
Subtracting (i) from (ii)

3 105 = (D D) = [5 102]
d d
3 105 103
= = 0.6 106 = 0.6 107 = 6000
5 102
Answer 9.
(a) Snells law of refraction states that the for a given pair of media, the ratio of the sine of the angle of incidence
to the sine of the angle of refraction.
sin i
=
sin r
In the fig. is shown a labelled diagram to prove the law of refraction, using Hygens principle. A plane wavefront
AB is incident on a plane surface XY separating a rarer medium of refractive index n1 from a denser medium of
refractive index n2. AB is the plane wavefront incident at an angle. Every point on the incident wavefront
becomes a source of secondary wavelets. Using Hygens principle CD is the refracted wavefront.
The time taken by the incident ray disturbance to go from B to C
BC B
t= c c1
1
In this time the disturbance from A spreads in a sphere of radius
AD = c2Xt.With A as centre radius AD draw an arc. Draw CD i
A i C
tangent to this arc. Thus, CD is the refracted wavefront and X Y
x y
ACD = r, the angle of refraction. r
BC c1t
Clearly, in ABC, sin i = = ... (i) D
c2
AC AC
AD c2t
and in ACD, sin r = = ...(ii)
AC AC
Dividing (i) by (ii), we have c
sin i c t AC c n 1 n2
= 1 = 1 = = , which is the required law.
sin r AC C2 t c2 c n1
n2
EVERGREEN
SERIES
(b) We know that the intensity at any point P on the screen is given by

I = 4I0 cos2 , where is the phase difference between the two disturbances from the two coherent
2
sources reaching the point P.
We know that for the point
1
y=
3
d
Now, p= .y
D
d 1 D
or p= . =
D 3 d 3
2 2 2
= p= . =
3 3
1
= 60, cos2 =
2 2 4
1 I0
I = I0 =
4 4
Answer 10.
(a) Long-sightedness : It is a defect of the eye. A person suffering from long-sightedness is able to see clearly
the objects lying at far off distance but the near objects appear to be blurred. The defect is due to (i) increase
in focal length of eye lens (ii) contraction of eye balls.
The long-sightedness is due to increase in the focal length of
the eye lens. The image of object at nearby distances is formed
by the eye at a point behind the retina. This defect is corrected
by using a convex lens of suitable focal length. The necessary
diagram is given. In this case, the image of the objects lying nearer
Corrected hypermetropic eye.
than the near point is formed at the near point as shown.
(b) The path of a ray of light (monochromatic) incident on a face of the prism is as shown in the fig.
Incident ray A
N
Equilateral prism
B C
Emergent ray A
Answer 11.
(a) The maximum angle of incidence is 90 and the corresponding angle of refraction is C.
A>x
r1 = C
Also, r1 + r2 > 2C r1 r2
C + r2 > 2C
r 2 > 2C C > C B C
Angle of incidence on the face AC is always greater than the critical angle.
Hence, their will be no refracted ray because total internal reflection will take place.
(b) Telescope in normal adjustment :
B1
B
A1
A Eye piece
Objective
f0
M=
fe

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Answer 12.
(a) The required Einsteins equation is
1 2
h = h0 + mv
2
1 2
= h0 + eVS eVS = mv
2
where 0 = threshold frequency, = frequency of the incident light
(i) As the frequency of the incident light is increased, more and more energy is available to the
photoelectrons, since 0 is fixed for a given photo surface. As the kinetic energy increases stopping
potential will also increases.
(ii) When the intensity of the incident light is increased, number of incident photon increases. Since one
photon ejects one electron and hence the photoelectric current increases.
(b) Let be the de-Broglie wavelength of the electron and the photon. Then
h
= , where p is the momentum of the electron.
p
Now, energy of the photon c
Ep = h = pc

1 2 1 1h
Kinetic energy of the electron Ee = mv = pv = v
2 2 2
Ep pc c
= =2
Ee 1 v
pv
2
Since c >> v, Ep > Ee
Answer 13.
(a) Rutherford, from his experiment on -ray scattering made a qualitative analysis and concluded that the atom
contains positively charged particles at its centre called the nucleus of the atom. Almost the whole mass of
the atom is concentrated at the nucleus. Electrons keep on revolving around the nucleus at some distance.
The space between the nucleus and the electron is empty. The charge on the nucleus is equal to the total
charge on the electrons. The above conclusion were based on the following observations :
(1) Most of the -particle incident on the gold foil passed through it unscattered indicating an empty space.
(2) Some -particles were scattered at small angles and their angular momentum were definite. The part of
the atom deflecting them must also be + ve. Thus, he reached the conclusion that the + ve charge of
the atom is concentrated in a small space.
(3) Very few about 1 in row -particles were back scattered. It indicates that a few of them experience a
strong repulsive force.
screen
source of
particle
microscope
(b) Energy of hydrogen atom in the ground state of the

hydrogen atom is 13.6 eV. The other energy levels are as 0 n=
shown. Since all the electrons are in the ground state, they 0.85 ev n=4
have each a total of 13.6 eV. The energy of the incident
0.5 ev n=3
photon is 9 eV. A photon will be absorbed by the atom only
if after energy is absorbed the atom can shift to any other 3.4 ev n=2
excited state.
Energy of the photon atom after it absorb the photon = 13.6 + 9 = 4.5 eV.
Since there is no energy level corresponding to 4.5 eV, the photon will be transmitted.
Answer 14.
(a) The units of radioactivity are :
(i) Ci (ii) mCi (iii) rfd (rutherford) .
(i) Ci : It is the activity of 1 g of radium which disintegrates at the rate of 3.7 1010 disintegration per sec.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
(ii) 1 mCi = 103 Ci = 3.7 107 disintegration per sec.

(iii) 1 rutherford = 106 disintegration per sec.
Now, 1 mC = 3.7 107 distintegration per sec.
= 37 106 distintegration per sec.
= 37 rfd.
(b) If N0 is the number of atoms of the radioactive substance at t = 0 and A0, the activity at that time, then
A 0 = N0 ... (i)
If N is the number of atoms after one half life, then
1
N 1
N = 0 = N0
2 2
After two half lives 2
1 N N0 1
N= 0 = = N0
2 2 4 2
n
1
Similarly, after n half lives, number of atoms left behind = N0 .
2
Activity A after n half lives is n
1
A = N0 ... (ii)
2
Dividing (ii) by (i), we have
n
=
A 1
A0 2
n
1
A = A0
2
Answer 15.
(a) The circuit diagram of an amplifier in common emitter
C
configuration using a pnp transistor is as shown in +
B RL
the fig.
Input Signal
Output
The emitter base junction is forward biased and E
collector emitter is reversed biased. The signal to

be amplified is connected in series with the battery
in the emitter base junction. The output is taken
across the collector and emitter junctions. The voltage across the load resistor is opposite phase to VCC.
V0 = VCE = VCC IC RL
When an a.c. signal is fed to the input circuit, the +ve of the input signal increases the forward bias. As a
result, the emitter current and hence the collector current increases. Due to this V0 decreases, because ICRL
increases.
The negative half of the input signal opposes the forward bias and hence the emitter current decreases. The
decrease in IC decreases with ICRL and hence the output increases.
The variation in the output voltage is much larger than the variation in the input signal. Thus, the signal is
amplied. There is a phase difference of 180 between the output and input signals as shown in the fig.
(b) The Boolean expression and the truth table for the combination of gates is given in the figure.
The output of NOR gate is A + B = A . B and the output of the NAND gate = A . B . C
Truth Table
A B C A+B A.B.C
0 0 0 1 1
1 0 0 0 1
0 1 0 0 1
1 1 0 0 1
0 0 1 1 0
1 0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0 1

EVERGREEN
SERIES
PART-I
Answer 1.

(A) (i) (b) EA = away from A and EB = 2 away from B = 2 towards A.
2 0 0 0
2
Then E A E B = 2 =
0 0
(ii) (c) Its resistivity will remain the same.
(iii) (a) Velocity of the particle.
1
(iv) (c) sin C = tan ip,
cosec C = tan ip
C = cosec1 (tan ip)
E
(v) (b) Et = 13.6 eV, EK = P
2
E E
13.6 = EK + EP = P + EP = P
2 2
EP = 13.6 2 = 27.2 eV
1 q 1 q
(B) (i) E= . + .
4 0 0.1 0.1 4 0 0.1 0.1
9 109 3 106 9 109 3 106

= +
0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
= 2 9 3 105 = 5.4 106 NC1 along AB.
qA 10 cm qB
O
3 C 3 C
20 cm
(ii) Slope of the I V graph represents, conductance, the reciprocal of resistance. Conductance of X is more
than that of Y.
X has a less resistance and hence less resistivity.
Resistivity of Y is more than that of X.
V 2 220 220
(iii) RA = = = 484
P 100
200 200
RB = = 1000
40
Lamp A has less resistance.
(iv) A potentiometer is said to be sensitive if it can measure extremely small potential difference of the order
V.
(v) Amperes circuital law is expressed mathematically

B. dl = 0I
(vi) The two parallel beams of electrons will repel each other on account of the electrostatic force between
them.
(vii) The failure of a lens to bring the rays of different colours to focus at the same point after refraction
through the lens is called chromatic aberration. It is measured by the difference in the focal lengths of
the lens corresponding to red and violet colours.
Chromatic aberration = fr fv

EVERGREEN
SERIES
4.80 4.80
(viii) = ( 1) A or A = = = = 7.74
1 1.62 1 0.62
(ix) Two independent sources of light cannot be coherent. The phase of the light emitted by the two sources
cannot be the same. Even the phase of light from the same source goes on changing. Further the
wavelength emitted by them will also be different.
D
(x) Width of the central maxima is 2 .
d
(i) Thus if is decreased, the central maxima will decrease.
(ii) If d is decreased, the width of the central maxima will increase.
(xi) Since = tan ip, the polarising angle depends upon the refractive index and hence on colour of light.
Since v > r , the polarising angle will be more for the violet colour than for red colour.
(xii) Electrons are preffered because their de-Broglie wavelength is of the order of X-rays and hence they can
be diffracted from crystals like X-rays.
(xiii) Quality of X-rays depends upon the accelerating potential between the cathode and the anticathode.
Accordingly hard or soft can be produced. The intensity of X-rays depends upon the number of electrons
striking the anticathode. This depends upon the heating current and can be controlled by controlling
current.
1
(xiv) TH = 24 days, mass of the sample left behind i.e., N = . Now, N = N0et
16
t
n
N 1 T 1
= =
N0 2 2
n 4 n
1 1 1
= or =
1
16 2 2 2
n = 4 or t = 4T = 4 24 = 96 days
(xv) Acceptor energy levels are the levels produced in an intrinsic semiconductor when it is doped with a
trivalent impurity. These levels are just situated just above the valence bond.
PART-II
SECTION-A
Answer 2.
(a) The electric intensity at a short distance on the axial and the equatorial line of a dipole are
1 2p
Eaxial = ... (i)
4 0 r 3
1 p
Eeq. = ... (ii)
40 r 3
Dividing (i) by (ii), we get
Eaxial
=2
Eeq.
(b) Consider a hemispherical charged surface ABC having a surface charge density and radius r as shown in
the fig. O is the centre of the hemispherical surface. Let PQRS be an elemental ring of the surface.
Radius of the ring be PM.
B
The from the fig.
PM
= sin P M Q
r
R S
PM = r sin
The thickness of the ring = PR
PR d
Now, d= A C
r O
PR = r d dE
Surface area of the ring = 2 PM PR

= 2r sin r d dE
= 2r2 sin d
Charge on the elementary ring
dq = 2r2 sin d
= 2r2 sin d

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Considering the symmetry of the problem, it can be shown that horizontal components of the intensity dE i.e.,
dE sin due to whole ring will cancel each other.
1 dq
E = dE cos = cos
40 r 2
/2 /2
1 2 r 2 sin cos d
=
4 0 r2
=
4 0 sin 2 d
0 0
/ 2
cos 2
= =
4 0 2 0 4 0
Answer 3.
(a) Accelerating potential = V
E
Both the electron and proton have the same charge but different masses +
Fe = Ee +
+
Ee
Acceleration of the electron ae = +
me
electron
0.8 m
Ee
Acceleration of the proton ap =
mp
Since both start from rest and if S1 and S2 are the distances covered by them before they meet, then
1
S1 = aet 2
2
1 2
S2 = a pt
2
S1 ae mp 1.67 1027
= = =
S2 ap me 9.1 1031
= 0.1835 104 = 1.835 103 = 1835
S1 = 1835S2
Also, S1 + S2 = 0.08
1835S2 + S2 = 0.08
1836S2 = 0.08
0.08
S2 =
1836
0.08
S1 = 1835 = 0.079 0.08
1836
Practically S1 is almost equal to 0.08 m.
(b) We know that according to Ohms law
V
=R
I
V l
=
I a
V I
or =
l a
V I
But = E, = J, the current density
l a
E = J
1 1
J= E = E =

In vector form

J = E

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Answer 4.
(a) The variation of resistivity of metals and copper with temperature are shown below :
Resistivity
P
T
Temperature
The resistivity of metals increases with temperature whereas that of carbon decreases with temperature.
(b) Maximum power theorem states that the power delivered by a source to an external load R
is maximum when the load resistance is equal to the internal resistance of the source.
Let E be the emf of the source and r its internal resistance and R its external resistance.
Then the current in the circuit is E
I= E r
R+r
Power consumed by the resistor R will be
E2
P = I2R = .R
(R + r )2
P = E2R (R + r)2 ... (i)
Now, P will be maximum if
dP
=0
dR
Differentiating (i) w.r.t. R, we have
dP
= E2 [R( 2) (R + r)3 + (R + r)2 .1]
dR
2R 1 E2
= E2 3
+ = [ 2R + R + r]
(R + r ) (R + r )2 (R + r )3
dP E2
= [r R]
dR (R + r )3
E2
or [r R] 0=
(R + r )3
r =R
Power delivered will be maximum to the external load if load resistance is a equal to internal resistance of
the cell.
Answer 5.
m
(a) The resistivity of a material is given by the relation = , where m is mass of the electron, n is the
ne2
number of electrons/volume and the average relaxation time.
Resistivity of the metals increases with the rise of temperature. This is because on account of rise of
temperature, the instantaneous velocities of the electron increase. Thus, the average velocity increases and
the relaxation time decreases.
1
Since , therefore, resistivity decreases. In the case of semiconductor, the resistivity increases. This is

because of the increase in the number of electrons n contributing to resistivity increases. On gaining thermal
energies electrons gain energy enough to go to conduction band.
(b) The following are points of difference between paramagnetic, diamagnetic and ferromagnetic substances :
Diamagnetic Paramagnetic Ferromagnetic

1. They are magnetised in a Weakly magnetised in the Strongly magnetised in the
direction opposite to the direction of the magnetising field. direction of the field.
magnetising field.
2. Magnetic susceptibility is Magnetic susceptibility small but Large and positive.
small but ve. + ve.
3. Magnetic lines of force Lines of force prefer to pass Magnetic lines of force strongly
prefer not to pass through a through it. prefer to pass through it.
diamagnetic substances.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Answer 6.
(a) Amperes circuital law states that the line integral of a magnetic field around a closed path is equal to 0 times
the current enclosed by the path. Mathematically, A D

B. dl = 0 I B C
Consider a long solenoid having n turns per unit length and carrying a current I ampere. To find the magnetic
field within the solenoid consider a rectangular path ABCD. The magnetic field B is along the axis of the
solenoid. Just outside the solenoid B = 0.
B C D A
Then, B. dl = B . dl + B . dl + B . dl + B . dl
ABCD A B C D
C
= B dl cos 90 + B dl cos 0 + B dl cos 90 + 0
B
=0+B dl + 0 + 0
= B BC ... (i)
No. of turns enclosed in the length BC = BC n
By Amperes circuital law

B. dl = 0 BC n I ... (ii)
B BC = 0 BC n I
B = 0 nI
(b) The required relation is
F 0 2I1I 2
= ,
l 4 r
where I1 and I2 are the currents flowing through the long wires separated by a distance r.
F
= 2 107 m, then I = 1A
If I1 = I2 = I, r = 1 m,
l
One ampere is that much current which when flowing through each of the two infinitely long parallel wires
results in a force per unit length of 2 107 Nm1 on each of the wire.
Answer 7.
(a) In an ideal resistor, the current and the emf are in phase. Therefore, they can be represented by
E = E0 sin t
I = I0 sin t
Instantaneous power Pi is given by
Pi = EI = E0I0 sin2t
1 cos 2t = E0 I0 (1 cos 2t)

= E0I0
2 2
Now, average power P is given by
1
T
1 T
E 0 I0 E 0 I0
T

Pav = Pi dt = dt cos 2t
T T 2 2
0 0 0
1 E 0 I0 T E 0 I0 sin 2t
= [t ]0
T 2 2 2
1 E I E I T E I
= 0 0 . T 0 0 [sin 2t ]0 = 0 0 . T 0
T 2 4 T 2
2
E 0 I0 E 0 E 0 Vrms Vrms
= = V
= rms =
2 2R R R

EVERGREEN
SERIES
(b) A transformer works on the principle of mutual induction i.e., when a varying current is passed through a coil
and induced emf is produced in a nearby coil.
Laminated iron core
EP ~ NS ES
When a varying current (a.c) is passed through the primary of the transformer, a varying flux is linked with
the primary. This varying magnetic flux is linked with the secondary also. Thus, according to Faradays law
of electromagnetic induction, an induced emf is produced both in the primary and the secondary. However,
since the number of turns in the secondary is much larger than the number of turns in the primary, the voltage
will be stepped up. If NS and NP is the number of turns in the primary and in the secondary and ES and EP the
emf produced in the primary and the secondary, then
d d
E S = NS ... (i), is the induced emf per turns
dt dt
d
EP = NP ... (ii)
dt
Dividing (ii) by (i), We have
ES N
= S ... (iii)
EP NP
Since a transformer transfers the power from primary to secondary.
Power in the primary = Power in the secondary
EPIP = ES IS
ES IP
= ... (iv)
EP IS
It is clear from this relation that if ES > EP, then IS < IP i.e., what is gained in voltage is lost in current.
SECTION-B
Answer 8.
(a) When light waves from two sources superpose, it is observed that in the region of superposition, there is a
redistribution of energy. At some points in the medium where the two waves reach in phase, the resulting
intensity increases. At some other points where the two waves reach in the opposite phase, the resulting
intensity decreases. This redistribution of energy is called interference.
To have sustained interference two independent sources cannot be used because they are never coherent.
For sustained interference, the phase difference between the light emitted by the two sources must be zero or
constant. However, even the light emitted by the same sources goes on changing with time. Hence, phase
difference cannot remain constant. The sources, therefore, must be coherent i.e., they must be derived from
the same source. Whatever change in phase will take in one will also take place in the other, thus keeping the
phase diffraction constant.
(b) Difference between interference and diffraction :
Interference Diffraction
1. Due to the superposition of waves from two 1. Due to the superposition of waves from the
coherent sources. two parts of the same wavefront.
2. Fringer are equispaced i.e., their width is the 2. Fringes or bands are not equispaced.
same. 3. The intensity at the maxima of consecutive
3. Intensity of all fringes is the same. Intensity bands goes on decreasing rapidly.
of light is zero at minima. 4. The diffraction is less contrasty.
4. The interference pattern is contrasty.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Question 9.
(a) In the figure is shown a beam of unpolarised light incident on a transparent medium, at the polarising angle.
The reflected ray is completely polarised with the plane perpendicular to the plane of incidence.
The state of polarisation of the reflected and the refracted ray is as shown.
Let ip be the polarising angle and the refractive index of the material of the transparent medium, then
= tan ip ... (i) (By Brewster law)
Also, if rp is the angle of refraction, then
sin i p
= ... (ii)
sin rp N
A B
sin i p
tan ip =
sin rp vp
90
sin i p sin i p O
=
cos i p sin rp
cos ip = sin rp
sin (90 ip) = rp C
90 = ip + rp L
From the fig. NOB + BOC + COL = 180

ip + BOC + rp = 180
BOC = 180 (ip + rp)
= 180 90 = 90
The reflected ray and the refracted rays are mutually perpendicular.
(b) Here, critical angle for the medium = ic
and polarising angle = ip
We know that
1 sin i p
= sin i = tan ip =
c cos i p
1 sin i p
=
sin ic cos i p
cos ip = sin ip .sin ic
cos (90 rp) = sin ip sin ic
sin rp = sin ip sin ic
r p = sin1 (sin ip sin ic)
Answer 10.
v0 D
(a) Magnifying power of the microscope = 1 + = 30
u0 fe
f0 = 1.25 cm, fe = 5 cm
D 25
Magnification produced by the eye lens = 1 + f = 1 + =6
e 5
30 v0
Magnification produced by the objective lens = = u
6 0
v0
or 5=
u0
v 0 = 5u0
Also, for a lens
1 1 1
=
v u f
1 1 1
+ =
5u0 u0 1.25
1 6 1
=
u0 5 1.25
6 1.25
u0 = = 1.50 cm
5
v 0 = 5 1.50 = 7.50 cm
EVERGREEN
SERIES
For the eye lens, u = ?, v = 25 cm, f = 5 cm

1 1 1
Now, applying = to the eye lens
v u f
1 1
=1
25 u 5
1 1 1 5 +1 6
= + = =
u 5 25 25 25
25
u= = 4.16 cm
6
The required set up of the microscope is as below :
F O O
1.25
7.5 cm 4.16 cm
Objective
Eye piece
(b) A lens has two principal focal lengths.
First focal length of a lens is the value of u for which v = and second focal length of a lens is the value of
v for which u is infinity.
Relation between the two :
We know that for a lens
1 1 ( ) 1 1
= 2 1
v u 1 R1 R 2
If the medium on the two sides of a lens is the same, then
f1 = f2
Answer 11.
(a) Here, R1 = 0.20 m = 20 cm, R2 = 50 cm, v = 1.55, r = 1.50
If fv and fr are the focal lengths of the lens for the violet and red colours of light, then
1 1 1 7
= (1.55 1) + = 0.55
fv 20 50 100
100
fv = = 25.94 cm
0.55 7
100
Similarly, fr = = 28.57 cm
7 0.5
Chromatic aberration= 28.57 25.94 = 2.63 cm
(b) (i) Advantages of a reflecting telescope :
1. Due to the large aperture of the mirror, the image formed is much brighter than that formed by
refracting telescope.
2. The image formed does not suffer from choromatic aberration.
(ii) 1. A good telescope must produce a distinct image of the distant object i.e., magnifying power must
be high.
2. It must have a high resolving power.
SECTION-C
Answer 12.
(a) According to de-Broglie hypothesis particle waves there exists a particle waves. The moving particles can be
considered as waves. The waves associated with matter are called matter waves.
We know that, in the case of electromagnetic, the energy carried by a wave of wavelength is
hc
E= ,

where c is the velocity of waves. If a mass m is associated with a photon, then its momentum is
p = mc
Also, E = mc2 = pc

EVERGREEN
SERIES
hc
and E=

hc h
= pc or = ... (i)
p
h
For the photon = , de-Broglie argued that since nature loves symmetry, this relation must also hold good
p
for all material particles. For a material particle of mass m moving with a velocity v, p = mv.
h h h
= = = ... (ii)
mv p 2 mE
When an electron is accelerated through a potential difference of V volts, then
E = eV
Putting this value of E above, we have
h
=
2meV
6.6 1034 1010 1
=
31 19 V
2 9 10 1.6 10
12.27
=
V
(b) Let us consider a free electron of rest mass m0 to be at rest. Let a photon of energy hv incident on it be
absorbed by the photon. Let the electron move with a velocity v after absorbing the electron, then according
to the law of conservation of energy
hv + m0c2 = m02c 4 + p 2c 2 ... (i)
and according to the law of conservation of momentum
hv
+0 =p
c
hv = pc ... (ii)
The reaction is balanced in respect of atomic or charge number and mass number.
Squaring (i)
h2v2 + m02c 4 + 2hv m0c2 = m0c4 + p2c2
or p2c2 + m02 c4 + 2hvm0c2 = m0c4 + p2c2
2hv0m0c2 = 0
Which is not possible. Thus, if we suppose that the photon is absorbed by the electron, we get an absurd
result. Thus, we conclude that a free electron at rest cannot absorb a photon. Since the laws of physics
remain the same for particle at rest or in motion, it follows that a free moving electron also cannot absorb the
photons.
Answer 13.
(a) Energy of the hydrogen atom in the nth orbit is
13.6
En = eV
n2
13.6 13.6
E1 = = 13.6 eV, E2 = = 3.4 eV,
1 4
13.6
E3 = = 1.51 eV,
9
13.6 13.6
E4 = = 0.85 eV, E5 = = 0.54 eV
16 25

EVERGREEN
SERIES
These energies are represented on the energy level diagram and the transitions producing different series are
shown below :
1. Lyman series is produced when transition takes place from n=4 n=5 Ionised atom
0
higher orbits to the ground state as shown. 0.85 Excited
n=3 Bracket States
2. Balmer series is produced when the transition takes place 1.5
series
from higher orbit to n = 2. Paschen

series
n=2
Paschen series is produced for transitions from higher orbit to 3.40
Balmer
n = 3. series
Similarly, Brackette and Paschen series are produced by transition

to n = 4 and n = 5 respectively.
(b) X-rays are absorbed by bones because of their large coefficient
of absorption. X-rays lose their intensity according to the relation
I = I0 ex. As x, the thickness of the bone is large, they cannot n=1
Ground state
pass through it easily and cast their shadows. This helps in 13.6
locating fractures if any in the bone. Lyman

series
Answer 14.
(a) We know that, 1 curie = 3.7 1010 disintegration/sec. Let us find the mass of 1 curie i.e., we want to find the
mass of a radioactive substance mass number A and half life T to have an activity of 1 curie.
We know that
dN
= N ... (i)
dt
0.693
Now, =
T
If m is the mass of 1 curie, then number of atoms in m g will be
6.023 1023 m
N=
A
Putting these values in (i), we have
0.693 6.023 1023 m

3.7 1010 =
T A
3.7 1010
m= AT
0.693 6.023 1023
= 8.57 1014 g
(b) The binding energy per nucleon v/s mass number curve is as shown in the fig.
8.8 MeV Fusion Fission

B.E. per nucleon
Mass number
1. Conclusion : The binding energy is small for lighter nuclei and it increases with the mass number and is
maximum for iron (~ 88 MeV).
2. The binding energy curve shows peaks for those elements in which the number of neutrons
= number of protons showing they are more stable.
3. The curve shows that both during fission and fusion energy will be released.
4. Elements for which A is large have less binding energy showing that they are unstable. They can undergo
spontaneous disintegration.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Answer 15.
(a) Need of modulation :
(i) Size of the antenna : For transmitting a signal we need an antenna. This antenna should have a size
comparable to the wavelength of the signal so that the antenna properly senses the time variation of the
c
signal. For a wave of frequency 20 kHz, the wavelength is 1.5 km which is difficult to construct
v
and operate. There is a need of translating the information in low frequency signal into a high frequency
signal before transmission.
(ii) If a number of transmitters transmitting the base band signal simultaneously, then these signal over the
same frequency range 20 Hz to 20 kHz will get mixed up. If transmission is done at a high frequency
different users may use adequate band width for that purpose.
(b) (i) For long distance transmission of signals, we usually use a short wave band. This is because the waves
of short wavelength shot towards the sky are reflected back by the ionosphere and received back. They
can be made to reach anywhere on the ground.
(ii) Eg = 0.73 eV = 0.73 1.6 1019 J
The maximum wavelength which can be detected is
hc 6.6 1034 3 108
max = =
Eg 0.73 1.6 1019
6.6 3
= 107 m
0.73 1.6
6.6 3
= 103 = 16952
0.73 1.6
***

EVERGREEN
SERIES
PART-I
Answer 1.
(A) (i) (c) The electric field inside the spherical conductor increases from zero to maximum. For distances
1
r > R, the radius of the sphere, the electric intensity varies as .
r2
(ii) (a) By colour code.
0I a
(iii) (b) B1 at a distance 2a will be B1 = and at a distance , the effective current will be
4a 2
2
I a I
2
. =
a 2 4
0 I
B2 =
2 4a
B2
= 1.
B1
(iv) (b)

(v) (d) =
1
= , = (1 + )

=
1+
(B) (i) It states that the capacity of a conductor is increased by bringing near it another uncharged earth
connected conductor.
(ii) Here, V is the same.
V2 1
P= , i.e, P
R R
PA 2
PB = 1
(iii) It is so because then the wheatstone bridge becomes insensitive when the resistances in the four arms
are widely different.
V
(iv) The slope of the VI graph gives the resistance of the conductor.
R = tan
(v) 1 Bohrs magneton = 9.27 1024 Am2
(vi) The current sensitivity of a galvanometer can be increased by :
(1) increasing the number of turns in the coil.
O I
(2) increasing area.
(3) by making the magnetic field strong.
(vii) This is so because the deviation produced by the prism is different for different colours. The refractive
index of the material of the prism is different for different colours being more for violet than for red.
(viii) Magnifying power of a simple microscope is defined as the ratio of the angle subtended at the eye by
the image to the angle subtended by the object when both are the least distance of distinct vision.
(ix) The given beam of light is made to be incident on a polaroid which is rotated gradually. If the intensity
of the transmitted light does not change, the incident beam of light is unpolarised. If the intensity of
transmitted light varies between a maxima and minima, it is polarised.
(x) Resolving power of an optical instrument is the ability of the telescope to show two point objects lying
very close to each other as separate.
1.22
The limit of resolution of telescope =
D
1
The resolving power R


EVERGREEN
SERIES
(xi) The two sources will be said to be coherent, if :

(1) They emit light of the same wavelength or frequency.
(2) They emit light of a zero or constant phase difference and preferably of the same amplitude.
(xii) The required graph is as shown :
m
O
T T T
(xiii) A photon has greater K.E. Time
(xiv) Potential barrier : It is small difference developed across the depletion region which prevents the flow
electrons and holes after the formation of the depletion region.
(xv) Transistor may have three states.
Active
cut off
Saturation
PART-II
SECTION-A
Answer 2.
(a) Potential energy of a charge distribution is defined as the work done in assembling that charge distribution
by bringing the charges from infinity to the respective points. Let the charge q1 be brought from infinity to
the point A. No work will be done. Since there is no electric field against which work will be done. Let the
charge q2 be now brought. Let the charge be at any time at the point P at a distance r from the point A.
q1 q2
A P
r12 B
1 q
Then E= . 12 r
40 r
Then the small amount of work done in moving it further through a small distance dr
dW = E dr
r12 r
1 q1 2 + 1 12
W = q dr = q1q2 r

40 r 2 40 1
q1 q2
1 r
1 12 1 1 1 r12
= q1q2 = q1q2 A B
40 r 40 r12
r13 r23
1 q1q2
W = .
4 0 r12 q3
C
Potential energy of a system of two charges
1 q1q2 1 q1q2
=0+ . = .
40 r12 40 r12
= q2 Potential at the point P due to extending this relation to q1 a system of three charges.
1 qq 1 qq 1 q q
= . 1 2+ . 1 3 + . 2 3
40 r12 40 r13 40 r23
(b) Here, V = 9x2 + 3y + z2
We know that, electric field at any point is the ve of the potential gradient at that point
V V
Ex = = 18x, Ey = =3
x y
V
= 2z
z

EVERGREEN
SERIES
^ ^ ^
E = E x i + E y j + Ez k
^ ^ ^
E = 18 x i 3 j 2 zk
At the point ( 2, 1, 0), the field is

E = + 36 i^ 3 j^ + 2 0
^ ^
E = 36 i 3 j , which is the required electric intensity.
Answer 3.
(a) Consider a wire AB of length L connected in series with a source of current. When a current I passes through
the wire of resistance r.
mA
Then p.d. across the ends of the wire
L
V = Ir = I. , where L is the length of wire and a is area of cross-section.
a P C
A B
Fall of potential per unit length of the wire r
V
V L 1
e= = I L
L a L

e=I
a
If the wire is of uniform area of cross-section and constant current is passed through it,
then e = constant
Fall of potential across a length l = e l
Which is the principle of a potentiometer wire.
(b) Let K be the dielectric constant of the plate R inserted between the two plates P and Q. Let the R plate be at a
distance x from P and at a distance y from Q.
R
Then x + y + b = d, x + y = d b
P
Q
A0 x y
Initial capacity of the capacitor =
d V1
b
If E is the electric intensity in the portion occupied by the air
K

V3
E = , ER = V2
0 K0
If V1, V2 and V3 are the potential in the three regions, then
V1 = E x, V2 = ER b, V3 = E y
If V is the potential difference across the plates of the capacitor, then
V= V1 + V2 + V3
= E x + ERb + E y
= E[x + y] + ERb
= E[d b] + ERb

= (d b) + .b
0 K0
1
V= d b 1
0 K
Q A
C= =
V 1
0 d b 1 K

A0
C=
1
d b 1
K
This capacity is independent of the position of the plate i.e., X and Y.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Answer 4.
(a) Let H be the required heat for boiling water and t1 and t2 the times taken.
H = P1 t1,
V2
where P1 = ... (i)
R1
and H = P2 t2,
V2
where P2 = ... (ii)
R2
When the two coils are connected in parallel. If RP is the resistance of the combination and
1 1 1
= +
R R1 R 2
V2 V2 V2
= +
RP R1 R 2
P = P2 + P2
It t is the time taken to produce the same amount of heat
H
H = P t, P =
t
H H H
= +
t t1 t2
1 1 1
= +
t t1 t2
t1t2 8 12 24
t= , = = 4.8 minutes
t1 + t2 20 5
(b) kWh (Kilowatt hour) : It is defined as the energy consumed by a circuit which uses a power of 1 kilowatt for
1 hour.
1 kWh = 1 kW 1 hour
1kWh = 1000 W 3600 s = 3.6 106 J
3.6 106
= eV = 2.25 1025eV
1.6 1019
Answer 5.
(a) Let a source of emf E and internal resistance r be connected to a load of resistor R.
Then total circuit resistance = R + r
R
E
I=
R+r
Power consumed by the resistor R is
r
E
P = I2R = .R, Battery
(R + r )2
it is clearly a function of R. Since E are r are constant.
dP d2P
P will be maximum, if = 0, is ve
dR dR 2
dP d
Now, =E [R . (R + r)2]
dR dR
= E [R( 2) (R + r)3 . 1 + (R + r)2 . 1]
2R 1
=E 3
+ 2
(R + r ) (R + r )
dP E E
= [ 2R + R + r] = [ r R]
dR (R + r )3 (R + r )3
EVERGREEN
SERIES
dP
If = 0, then r R = 0, r = R
dR
Thus power transferred to an external load is maximum, if r = R.
d 2P dP
[Please check that 2
is ve by differentiating again]
dR dR
(b) (i) In the first case, when the particle moves parallel to the magnetic field, = 0.
F = QvB sin 0 = 0 i.e., no force acts on the particle i.e., there will no acceleration and hence no change
in its kinetic energy.
(ii) In the second case, the force acting on the charged particle is maximum F = Q B sin 90 = QvB. In this
case, the particle moves in a circular path. The magnetic force only changes the direction but not the
magnitude of the velocity. Hence, no change in kinetic energy takes place.
Answer 6.
(a) The defining equations for the magnetic field is
^
F = Q B sin n = Q ( v B)
Clearly, F = QvB sin
If = 90, = 1 ms1,Q = 1C
and F = 1N, then B = 1 Tesla
Tesla : The magnetic field at a point in a magnetic field is said to be 1 Tesla if a charge of 1 coulomb moving
with a speed of 1 ms1 at right angles to the magnetic field experiences a force of 1 N.
In CGS system, the unit of magnetic field is called an Oersted. The magnetic field at a point is said to be 1
Oersted of a charge of 1 ab coulomb moving with a velocity of 1 cms1 at right angles to the magnetic field
experiences a force of 1 dyne.
F
Relation : F = Q v B, or B =
Qv
1N
IT =
1C 1ms 1
105 dynes dyne
= = 104
1
ab C 100 cms 1 ab coulomb cms 1
10
1T = 104 Oersted
(b) Magnetic elements at a place are the elements which must be known to completely know the magnetic field at
that place namely :
Geographic meridian
(i) Declination
F declination
(ii) Dip
(iii) Vertical or Horizontal components of the earths magnetic field. BH
A B
These are shown in the diagram. Dip
B
B= B2V + B2H magnetic
BV meridian
BV E
tan = B
H
D C
Answer 7.
(a) The transmission of power from the generating to the consumer station is through the transmission lines.
These lines have a certain resistance and when the current passes through the transmission lines, there is a
loss of power which appears as heat in the wires. To reduce this loss to a minimum, the voltage at the generating
is stepped up before its transmission. When the voltage is stepped, the current decreases and hence the loss
of power decreases.
Suppose a power of 3300 kW is to be transmitted at 6600 volts. The current through the transmission lines
will be
P 3300 103
I= = = 500 A
V 6600
If R is the resistance of the transmission line.
Loss of power = 500 500 R

EVERGREEN
SERIES
If the voltage is stepped by a transformer having a turns ratio of 20, then

V= 6600 20 volt
3300 103
Current = = 25 A
6600 20
Power loss in the second case = 25 25 R = 625 R
625 R 1
Ratio of the losses in the two cases = =
500 500 R 400
Loss in the second case is drastically reduced.
2 1
1 2
(b) (i) Z = Lr + R , at resonance Lr = C
C r r
Z = 0 + R 2 = R i.e., the circuit becomes resistive.

(ii) Power factor K = 1, = 0, K = cos = 1.
(iii) The voltage across the inductance and that across the capacitance have a phase difference of 180.
(iv) Wattless component = Iv sin = 0 at resonance.
Answer 8.
Unpolarised
(a) Light is a transverse wave. This can be shown with light Polariser
the help of this simple experiment. Figure shows an E0
unpolarised light beam incident on the first Analyser
polarising sheet, called the polariser where the E0 cos

transmission axis is indicated by the straight line
Transmission
on the polariser. axis Polarised
light
The polariser can be a thin sheet of tourmaline (a complex boro-silicate). The light, which is passing through
this sheet, is polarised vertically as shown, where the transmitted electric vector is E 0. A second polarising
sheet called the analyser, intercepts this beam with its transmission axis at an angle to the axis of the polariser.
As the axis of the analyser is rotated slowly, the intensity of light received beyond it goes on decreasing.
When the transmitting axis of the analyser becomes perpendicular to the transmission axis of the polariser, no
beam is obtained beyond the analyser. This means that the analyser has further polarised the beam coming
from the polariser. Since only transverse waves can be polarised, therefore, this shows that light waves are
transverse in nature.
(b) Intensity of the laser beam = 25 1014 Wm2

If u is the average density, then we know that

I= u c
1
I= 0 E 02 c
2
2I
E 20 = c
0
2I 2 2.5 1014
E0 = = = 4.34 108 NC1
0c 8.85 10 12 3 108
Further we know that
E0
B0 = c
E0 4.34 108
or B0 = = = 1.44 T
c 3 108
Answer 9.
(a) Let the light from the two coherent sources be represented by
y 1 = a sin t
and y 2 = a sin (t + )
EVERGREEN
SERIES
According to the principle of superposition

y = y1 + y2 = a sin t + a sin (t + )
= a [sin (t + ) + sin t]
= 2a sin (t + t + ) cos
2 2

y = 2a cos sin t +
2 2
The resulting wave has an amplitude which varies with the phase difference between the two disturbances.
Intensity of the resulting wave which is proportional to square of the amplitude will be

I 4a2 cos2 P
2 A
I = 4a K cos
2 2

Clearly, I will be maximum, if = 0, 2
Imax = 4Ka2 B
If I0 is the intensity of the two coherent sources.
I0 = Ka2
Imax = 4I0 I
i.e., 4 times the intensity of each source.
(b) The experimental arrangement to observe the diffraction
pattern of the single slit diffraction is as shown in the fig.
The diffraction of light is observed only if the wavelength
of light is comparable to the size of the obstacle. The incident
light is in form of a parallel beam of light and the slit is quite
narrow. The diffraction pattern consist of a central maxima
flanked by a minima and a secondary maxima as shown. The
intensity of secondary maxima goes on decreasing rapidly. 0
3 2 2 3
Answer 10. F1 F2
a a a a a a

(a)
I1
O I
v
u v1
A B
In the fig. is shown a combination of two thin lenses A and B of focal length f1 and f2 . A point object O is
situated at a distance u from the lens combination on their common axis. The image of the object O is formed
at a point I after suffering refraction through both the lenses at distance v from the lens combination. This
image can be assumed to be formed into two stages.
(i) The lens A of focal length f1 forms the image of the object O at I1 in the absence of the lens B.
(ii) The image I1, then serves as an object for lens B giving rise to a real image at I.
For refraction at the lens A
1 1 1
= ... (i)
v1 u f1
and for refraction at the lens B
u = + v1
v=v
1 1 1
= ... (ii)
v v1 f2
If F is the focal length of the combination of the two lenses.
1 1 1
= ... (iii)
u v F

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Adding (i) and (ii), we get

1 1 1 1 1 1
+ = +
v1 u v v1 f1 f 2
1 1 1 1
= +
u v f1 f 2
1 1 1
or = +
F f1 f 2
(b) Here, f = 20 cm
(i) The object O will serve as a virtual object for the convex lens.
u = 12 cm, v = ?
When the lens is convex
O
1 1 1
=
v u f 12 cm
1 1 1
=
v 12 20
1 1 1 8
= + =
v 20 12 60
60
v= = 7.5 cm
8
(ii) If the lens is concave, then
f = 20 cm, u = + 12 cm, v = ?
1 1 1
=
v u f
1 1 1 2 1
= + = =
v 20 12 60 30
v = 30 cm
i.e., the image will shift away from O.
Answer 11.
(a) A rainbow is a pleasant sight observed in the sky after a rainbow.
It consists of colourful concentric arcs hanging in the sky. These Violet
Light
Secondary
coloured arc are formed due to dispersion and total internal from
rainbow
reflection from the tiny drops of water which remains suspended Red
Sun
in air. It is always observed with the back of the observer toward
the sun. The formation of the primary and the secondary rainbow
Red
is as shown in the fig.
rainbow
Primary
Clearly, a primary rainbow is formed after refraction one internal

R Violet
reflection whereas a secondary rainbow is formed after refraction
and two internal reflections. 42 52 V
Observer
(b) Formation of image by a telescope when the image is formed at
the distance of distinct vision is as shown below :
Objective Eye piece
object at
From
A A C
C
B
fe
B
D
Answer 12.
(a) Compton effect is the phenomenon due to which the wavelength of the scattered radiation by an element is
slightly greater than that of the incident radiation. It is observed that the change in wavelength of the scattered
radiation depends upon the change in the direction of the scattered radiation. It is explained on the basis of
the collision between the photon (a packet of energy and matter). When a photon strikes an photon electron
its direction of motion changes. The electron proceeds in some direction making an angle with the direction
of the incident photon.
EVERGREEN
SERIES
A part of the energy is given to the electron. As a result its own energy decreases and its wavelength increases.
In the elastic collision law of conservation of energy and momentum hold good. If and are the wavelengths
of the incident and scattered radiation, then the small change in wavelength = is given by
h
=(1 cos ),
m0c
where is angle between the incident and scattered radiation.
m0 = rest mass of the electron
Clearly, if = 0, cos 0 = 1
h
= (1 1) = 0
m0 c
i.e., there is no change in wavelength the observed in the direction of incidence.
If = 90, cos 90 = 0, then
h h
= (1 0) =
m0c m0c
This is the maximum change in wavelength observed and is called then compton wavelength.
(b) The mass m of a particle of rest m0 when moving with a velocity v is given by
m0
m=
1 v2
c2
Squaring both sides, we get
m02 m02c 2
m2 = =
v2 c2 v2
1
c2
Cross-multiplying
m2c3 m2u2 = m02c 2
Multiplying by c2 throughout, we get
m2c4 m2u2c2 = m02c 2
m02 c 4 = p 2 c 2 + m02 c 4
E2 = m02 c 4 + p 2 c 2
E= m02c 4 + p 2c 2 which the required relation.
Answer 13.
(a) Consider an electron to be revolving around a nucleus in an orbit of radius r. The charge on the nucleus is
+ e.
Since the electrostatic force supplies the necessary centripetal force.
1 e2 2
. 2 = mv , where m is mass of the electron.
40 r r
e2
mv2 = k . ... (i)
r
1
where k=
4 0

Further since the angular momentum of the electron is quantised.
nh m e
mvr =
2 r
nh +e
v = 2 mr
Putting this value of v in (i), we get
m n2 h2 ke 2
2 2 2 =
4 m r r
n 2h 2
r=
4 2 ke 2 m

EVERGREEN
SERIES
If the nth orbit, r = rn

n2 h2
rn =
4kme2
Clearly, r n n2
(b) In the case of X-rays, we know that maximum frequency of the X-rays emitted is given by
hv = eV, where V is the accelerating voltage of the electrons.
eV
v=
h
1.6 1019 50 103 1.6 5
= 34 = 1019
6.6 10 6.6
= 1.21 1019 Hz
Answer 14.
(a) Mean life : Radioactivity is a chance phenomenon. Different atoms of the radioactive substance disintegrate
at different times and hence their lives are different ranging from 0 to infinity. The mean of the lives of all the
atoms of radioactive substance is called the mean life of the radioactive substance. Mathematically, it can be
written as
0
1
Tm =
N0 t dN ... (i)
N0
Now, N = N0 e t
dN
= N0 e t ( ) = N0 e t
dt
dN = N0 et dt
Putting this value in (i), we have

1
Tm = t ( N 0e t )dt
N0
0

= t e t dt .
0
It can be shown that t e t dt can be found by using the method of integration by parts. Its value comes
1 0
out 2 .
1 1
Tm = =
2
(b) The nuclear fission is used in the nuclear reaction
+ 10 n 92 Ba + 36 Kr + 30 n + Q , where Q is called the Q value of the nuclear reactor. It is defined

235 141 92 1
92 U
as the energy equivalent of the mass defect in a nuclear reaction.
SECTION-C
Answer 15.
(a) In zener diode, we know that a large reverse current flows due to the V2 Reverse
VF
minority carrier when a sufficient reverse bias. The electric intensity is Forward
strong enough across the junction to pull the electrons. The VI
characteristics of a zener diode are as shown in the fig. At the zener voltage
the current rises suddenly.
Zener diode, when used as a voltage regulator gives a constant output
voltage even when the input voltage increases or the load current varies. +
R I1
The circuit diagram of a zener diode as a voltage regulator is as shown.
RL
When the potential difference across the zener diode exceeds VZ, zener Output
diode conducts and draws more current through the resistanc, thus
causing a greater voltage drop across the resistor R, keeping output
voltage across the load resistance constant.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
(b) The band structure of the (i) conductor (ii) semiconductor (iii) and insulalors is as shown :
(i) Conductor : In conductors the valence band is partially filled or the conduction and the valence band
overlap. Electrons near the top of the filled energy states have near than unoccupied energy state and
they can easily gain energy from the applied electric field to go to other states and contribute to
conductivity. Here, Eg = 0.
CB EC
EC
EV VB
VB
Conductor
(ii) Semiconductor : In this case the energy gap between

valence band and the conduction band is less ( ~ 1eV). At CR
room temperature the electrons can again energy and move

~ IeV
into the conduction band where they are free to move and
contribute to conductivity.
V.B.
Semi conductor
CB
(iii) Insulator : There is a large energy gap (~ 6 eV) between
the conduction band (CB) and the valence band (VB) as ~ 6eV
shown in fig. A large amount of energy is required by the
electron to go from VB to CB.
VB
Insulator
***

EVERGREEN
SERIES
PART-I
Answer 1.
(A) (i) (a) Since the net force on q is zero.
l
1 4q q 1 Qq Q
. + . =0 4q q
40 l 2 40 l 2
l
2
2
4q 2 4Qq
+ = 0 or 4Qq = 4q2
2
l l2
Q= q
2V 2 90 2 90 10 1
(ii) (c) I = = = = = = 0.1 A
R eff 60 30 1800 100 10
(iii) (c) Potential energy of a dipole = m B cos .
1 1
(iv) (c) Critical angle C = sin will be smallest when is maximum.

(v) (a) Forbidden energy gap is 0.7eV = 1.12 1019J
1 q2 q2 (AT)2
(B) (i) F = , = = = M1 L3T4A2
MLT 2 L2
0
40 r 2 4Fr 2 I
V
(ii) I = , since V is constant.
R
1
I R
R
(iii) The fuse wire must be of a material which has (i) low melting point (ii) high resistance.
l R
(iv) R = , = = constant. Clearly, if is large a must also be large. Since is large for manganin,
a l a
wire, it must be thicker also.
(v) No, because = 0, sin = 0, F = q v sin = 0.
(vi) In a tangent galvanometer I tan , hence a uniform scale cannot be provided.
Ig 2 Ig S
(vii) = , =
I 100 I R +S
1 S
=
50 R + S
R
50S = R + S or S=
49
(viii)The ray diagram of a corrected myopic eye is as shown.
F I
Concave lens
Eye lens
(ix) If p is the path difference and the phase difference then

2
= .p

(x) Resolving power of a telescope is
D
R.P. =
1.22
When D, the diameter of the objective is increased, resolving power increases.
(xi) Mass defect is the difference between the sum of the masses of the nucleons of a nucleus and its actual
mass.
EVERGREEN
SERIES
(xii) No, this relation holds good only for a photon which travels with velocity of light.
(xiii)This is so because of the attractive nuclear forces between the nucleons which keep them together.
Nucleons are not free in a nucleus.
(xiv) This is so because the input resistance is much less than the output resistance.
(xv) Satellites are used for long distance transmission. The signal is transmitted through space and is reflected
back or retransmitted by the satellite in any direction. This, increases the range over which the programme
can be received.
PART-II
SECTION-A
Answer 2. + + + + + +
(a) Let an electron enter at right angles to a uniform electric field produced between
the plates held a certain distance part. The electric field acts in the downward
direction.

F Ee
Force acting on the electron = Ee. Upwards acceleration produced by this force is = . The electron is
m m
thus simultaneously under the influence of two motions. (1) Uniform motion in the X-direction and (2) uniformly
accelerated motion in the upward direction. Let (x, y) be the position co-ordinates of the electron after a time t,
then
x = vt ... (i)
1 2 1 Ee 2
and y = 0 + at = t ... (ii)
2 2 m
x
To find the equation of the trajectory, put t = from (i) in (ii)
v
1 Ee x 2
y= . = kx2, which is the equation of a parabola.
2 m v2
Path is parabolic.
(b) ABC is an equilateral triangle and a charge q is placed at each of the points A, B, C. Each charge is at the
same distance from r the centre O. N
1 q
E.I. at O due to due to + ve charge at A, E1 = 4 . 2 along AO. A
0 r q
B
q
1 q
E.I. at O due to + q charge at B, E2 = . along BO.
40 r 2
M L
1 q
E.I. at O due to + q charge at C, E3 = 4 . 2 along CO. C
q
0 r
Angle between any two intensities is 120. Further E1 = E2 = E3 in magnitude. The
resultant of any two intensites is equal and opposite to the third intensity. Hence
C
their resultant is zero. A
1 q 1 q 1 q qE
. +
Potential at O = 4 r 4 r 4 r . + . v
0 0 0
2a
1 3q
= 4 . r V
0
Answer 3.
(a) Let an electric dipole be formed by two charges + q and q at the points qE
B
A and B be placed at an angle in a uniform electric field of intensity E.
Force on + q charge at A= qE in the direction of electric field.

Force on q charge at B = qE in the opposite direction to E .
Net force acting on the dipole is zero. However, these low forces form a couple of moment.
= Either force x arm of the couple
= qE BC
BC
From the fig., = sin
AB

= qE AB sin = pE sin ( p = q 2a)

In the vector form = pE
EVERGREEN
SERIES
Potential energy of the dipole in any position is the work done is taking the dipole in that position.
dW = pE sin d

W= p E sin d [Taking initial position when = 90]
q0
= p E[(cos )90]
= pE [cos cos 90] = pE cos

= p.E
(b) 3 resistances of 3 each are in parallel, their effective resistance is
1 1 1 1
= + + =1
Re 3 3 3
Re = 1
Total circuit resistance = 1 + 3 = 4
3
Current in the circuit = = 0.75 A
4
Answer 4.
(a) In the fig. in shown an unblanced wheatstone bridge. The distrilbution of current is as shown. Applying
second law to the mesh ABDA.
B
Q
i1 P i1 ig
ig
A G C
R S
i
i i1 i i1 + ig
D
i1P + GIg (i i1) R = 0 ... (i)

To the mesh BCDB
(i1 ig) Q (i i1 + ig) S G ig = 0 ... (ii)
When the resistance from the arm R is adjusted so that ig = 0 and the bridge is said to be balanced. The
above equations reduce to
i1P (i i1) R = 0
i 1P = (i i1) R ... (iii)
and iQ (i i1) S = 0
or iQ = (i i1)S ... (iv)
Dividing (iii) by (iv), we have
P R
= , which is the condition for balanced wheatstone bridge.
Q S
(b) In the fig. is shown the circuit diagram of a potentiometer for finding the internal resistance of a cell certain
potential gradient is produced in the potentiometer wire by an external battery. The cell E1 is first kept in the
open circuit. The jockey is slided over the wire and a balance point is located on the wire as shown by no
deflection in the galvanometer. The balancing length l1 is noted. The cell is now shunted by taking out a
resistance R from the resistance box and key K2 is inserted and balance point again located. The balancing
length l2 is also noted. Then
E l1 or E = kl1 K
V l2 V = kl2 A
K2 Rh
EV
Now r = B
V
kl1 kl2 l1 l2
= =
kl2 l2
A E1
G
Answer 5. RB
(a) We know that
V = E Ir, where E is the emf of the cell and V the pd across it when it is put in a closed circuit.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
When I = 0, E = V = 1.4 V (from the figure)
The current is maximum when V = 0.
E 1.4
0 = E = Ir or r = = = 0.5 A
Imax 2.8
(b) The required graph to show the variation of diffracted light with is as shown in the fig. below :
0
3 2 2 3
a a a a a a
Answer 6.
(a) Here BV = 0.3 G, BH = 0.4 G B = ?, = ?
Now, B= BV 2 + BH 2 = (0.3)2 + (0.4)2 = 0.5
BV 0.3
and tan =
= = 0.75
BH 0.4
= 36.9
(b) When an electron revolves around a nucleus it is equivalent to a current loop and a current loop behaves as
a magnetic dipole having magnetic dipole moments.
M = I A Am2
Area A of the loop = r2
e
and I = , where T is the time taken by it to complete one revolution.
T
2r
T=
v
e
I= .v
2r electrons
ev evr
M= . r 2 =
2 r 2
Since angular momentum is quantised
nh
mvr =
2
nh
vr =
2m
e nh neh
M= . = which is the expression for the dipole moments.
2 2m 4m
For n = 1
eh
M= , is the minimum magnetic moments possible and is called a Bohrs magneton.
4m
1.6 1019 6.6 1034
1 Bohrs magneion = = 9.2 1024 Am2
4 3.14 9.1 1031
Answer 7.
(a) If IV and EV are the virtual values of the current and voltage C L R
respectively, and EL, EC and ER the voltages across the inductor,
capacitor and resistor respectively. Then,
EL = IV XL = IV L
1
EC = IV XC = IV
C
ER = IV R

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Since voltage across the capacitor is greater then the voltage across the inductor, they can be represented on
the phasor diagram as shown. OA, OB and OC represent IVR, IVXC and IV XL respectively.
OD = OB BD
Y
= IV XC IVXL = IV [XC XL]
Now, OL2 = OA2 + AL2 C
IV XL
2 2
EV = IV [R2 + (XC XL)2]
A
O X
2
EV = IV (X C X L ) + R 2
IVXC
Ev EV D L
or IV = = IV(XC XL )
(XC X L )2 + R 2 Z B
2
1
Z= (X C X L )2 + R 2 = L 2
+ R is the inpedance of the circuit.
C
AL X C X L
and tan ==
OA R
is ve and implies that emf lags behind the current by .
(b) Application of Lenzs law gives the direction of current (i) Clockwise (ii) Clockwise (iii) Clockwise.
SECTION-B
Answer 8.
(a) Path difference between the distubances reaching P from the two slits S1 and S2 is
1
2 2
p = S2P S1P = (b + d ) 2 d
1 d
S1 P
1 b2 2 1 b2
= d 1 + d = d 1 + d b
2 d2 2 d2
b2+ d 2
p=
1 b2 S2
Screen
2 d

The wavelengths for which the path difference is (2n 1) will disappear because for them destructive
2
interference will take place
1 b2 = (2n 1)
2 d 2
1 b2
= . (n = 1, 2, 3, ... )
(2n 1) d
b2 b2 b2
i.e., , = , will be missing
d 3d 5d
(b) Distance between the two stations is
d = 36.9 103 m = 36900 m
n = 500 rps
d = 36900 350 = 36550 m
n = ?
We know that
nd = nd
d 36900
n = n = 500 = 504.8 rps
d 36550
Answer 9.
(a) (i) To get sustained interference, the phase difference between the two disturbances reaching a point must
be constant. This requires that the two sources must emit light of a same frequency or wavelength other
wise due to difference in wavelengths of the two sources, the phase at a point will not remain the same.
Further if phase difference between the two disturbances goes on changing interference will not be
sustained.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
(ii) The intensity at a point is given by
I = I0 + I0 + 2 I0 I0 cos , where is the phase difference
I = 2I0 [1 + cos ],

I = 4I0 cos2
2
2
(1) When p = 0, = .p=0

I P = 4I0 1 = 4I0
2
(2) At the point Q, p = ,= =
4 4 2
1
IQ = 4I0 cos2 = 4I0 = 2I0
4 2
IP 4I0
= =2
IQ 2I0
(b) In, single diffraction pattern, D
= 2
a
(i) When descreases, width of the central maxima decreases the diffraction pattern becomes narrow.
(ii) When a is decreased, diffraction pattern expands.
(iii) When another slit is placed parallel to first slit, two coherent sources will formed and hence interfence
pattern consisting of dark and bright fringes of equal width will appear.
Answer 10.
(a) It is a defect of the eye. A myopic eye can see near objects distinctly but is not able to see far off objects
clearly. For such an eye, there is a far point. Objects lying at distance upto the far point can be seen clearly
but those lying beyond cannot be seen clearly. This defect is due to :
(i) decrease in the focal length of the eye lens.
(ii) Eye ball becoming longer in length than normal.
To remove this defect, a concave lens of a suitable focal
length is used. For a myopic eye, there is a far point F R
i.e., the maximum distance upto which it can see. A
concave len of suitable focal length is used so that the
image of the distant object is formed at the far point.
Let the distance of the of the far point be x.
For the concave lens
Then for u = , v = x, f = ? F R
1 1 1
=
v u f
1 1
=
x f
f= x
Focal length of the concave lens is equal to the distance of the far point from the eye.
(b) The expression for the magnifying power a compound microscope is.
v D
M= 1+
u0 f
v D
M=
f0 1 + f
e
Clearly, M can be increased by :
(1) decreasing the focal length of objective.
(2) decreasing the focal length of eyepiece.
Answer 11.
(a) (i) Light is scattered from the dust particles present in the atmosphere. According to Rayleighs law, the
intensity of the scattered light is inversely proportional to the fourth power of the wavelength. On account
of large wavelength the red rays are scattered much less and will, therefore, be visible even from a large
distance.
(ii) The blue colour of the sky is also due to the smaller wavelength of blue rays. As the light comes from
the sun, it has to pass through the atmosphere. The dust particles present in the atmosphere scatter
light in all directions. The intensity of scattered blue colour is quite large and hence and the sky appears
to be blue.
EVERGREEN
SERIES
(b) In the fig. is shown the labelled diagram of a telescope, where the final image of a distant objective is formed
at the distance of distinct vision.
Magnifying power of a telescope is the ratio of the angle subtended by the final image to the angle subtended
by the image when both are at infinity.
A B
tan A C f
M= = = = 0 , where f0 is the focal length of the objective lens.
tan A B A C
A C
To find AC : For the eye lens
u = AC, v = D, f = + fe
1 1 1
Applying =
v u f Objective Eye piece
1 1 1
object at
=+
From
A A C
D u fe C
1 1 1
=+ + B
u fe D
fe
B
1 fe + D Df e D
= or u =
u D f e D + fe
f0 fe
M= 1 +
fe D
Answer 12.
(a) The graph between VS, the stopping potential and frequency of the incident radiation is as shown.
According to Eustein equation for photoelectric equation
h = h0 + eVS B
or eVS = h h0 S
h h
VS = 0 ... (i)
e e
The equation (i) is of the type y = mx + C is the equation of a straight
line. The graph AB is a straight line. 0
OA = 0 = Threshold frequency O A
h
Its slope tan represents the ratio .
e
h
= tan C
e
h = e tan
(b) If is the wavelength of the photon and v the velocity of the hydrogen atom, then if momentum of this
photon and that of hydrogen atom are equal, then
h
mv =

h
v=
m
6.6 1034
v= ms1
m
if = 1
6.6 1034
v= 10 = 3.95 103 ms1
10 1.67 1027
Answer 13.
(a) X-rays are electromagnetic waves having wavelength in the range of 1 100 . These wave have high
penetrating power. They can pass through human flesh but not through the bones. X-rays are produced
when fast moving electrons strike against a traget of high atomic weight like tungsten. A part of this energy is
converted into electromagnetic waves.
If V is the accelerating potential and and min the minimum wavelength of the X produced, then
hv = eV
c
h = eV
min
hc
min =
eV
EVERGREEN
SERIES
(b) Here, T = 1.4 1016 s, A = 238
dN
=?
dt
6.023 1023
Here, N=
238
0.693
= s1
1.4 1016
dN 0.693 6.023 10 23
= N = = 12.5 104 dis/s
dt 1.4 1016 238
Answer 14.
(a) The binding energy per nucleon vs mass number curve is as given here :
(i) The stability of a nucleus is directly related with the binding energy per A
B
BE per nucleon
nucleon. More the binding energy per nucleon more stable is the nucleus.
(ii) Fission is the splitting of a heavy nucleon into comparatively lighter
elements when struck with a particle. During fussion energy is released.
Similarly, when two lighter nuclei combine under suitable conditions to
produce a comparatively heavier element, energy is released. This is so
because both during fission and fusion there is a mass defect which
appears as energy. Energy per unit mass in fusion is much larger then mass number A
during fission.
(iii) In the region marked AB, the nuclei are most stable.
(b) In each atom of 12C
6
No of electron = 6
No. of proton = 6
No. of neutron = 12 6 = 6
In 12 g of carbon, no of each of them = 6 6.023 1023 = 36.138 1023
junction diode
Answer 15. D +
+
(a) A labelled diagram of a half wave RL
Input ~
rectifier is as shown below : Load resistance Output

V
The input and output waves are as shown.
Time Time
Sinusoidal AC Input
(b) The Boolean expression and the truth table are

Boolean expression = A.B
D1
Truth Table
A
A B A.B
0 0 0
D2
0 1 0 B
y
1 0 0
1 1 1 R
An AND gate gives an output if both the inputs are in the 1 state. 5V
Realisation of AND gate using Diodes.
When A and B are both connected to zero both D1 and D2 are forward biased and hence will conduct. The
voltage drop of 5 volts takes place making the point C at zero potential. When A is connected to zero and
B to 1, diode D1 will conduct and again C will be at zero potential. When B is connected to zero and A to 1,
again C will at zero. When both A and B are connected to 1, none of the diode will conduct and C will at a
high potential.
EVERGREEN
SERIES
PART-I
Answer 1.
(A) (i) (d) K.E. = QV = 1.6 1019 5 = 8 1019 eV.
(ii) (a) Applying Kirchhoffs first law, we get 1A
It is clear that 4A
2 1.3 A
I + 1.3 = 3
3A
I = 3 1.3 = 1.7 A
1A
(d) Since there is no change in velocity, E 0, B 0.
(iii)
(iv)
(c) Each portion of the different material of the lens will give rise to an image. Hence, there will be two
different images formed.
(v) (d) The combination is a NAND gate followed by a NOT gate. Hence, it behaves as an AND gate.
NAND + NOT = AND.
(B) (i) The maximum capacity that can be obtained by connecting them in parallel is 100 + 500 = 600 F and will
be zero when both are set at zero.
(ii) (i) Kirchhoffs first law is based on the conservation of charge.
(ii) Kirchhoffs second law is based on the principle of conservation of energy.
R 1
(iii) When the radius becomes , the area of cross-section will decrease to th and length will become
2 4
4 times.
4l l
New resistance R = = 16 = 16R.
a a
4

(iv) Ohms law in the vector form is J = E , where is the conductivity of the material of the conductor.
(v) Radius r of the circular path when a charged particle moves in a magnetic field is
mv
r=
BQ
m
r (_ Since v and B are constant)
Q
mp
rp
e
4mp 2mp
r =
2e e
rp 1
=
r 2
(vi) We will get two magnets. The dipole moments of each magnet will be half that of the original magnet.
(vii) This is due to the absence of atmosphere of the moon. Due to refraction in the atmosphere, the light
from the sun continues to be received even after the sunset.
1
(viii) Resolving power will be halved but the intensity of the image will becomes th of original intensity.
4
d 1
(ix) The distance through which an image is raised is x = d = 1 .

Clearly, x will be largest, when is maximum i.e., violet colour will be raised the most.
D
(x) The fringe width will become less because new wavelength = , because = .
d
It implies that the interference pattern will shrink i.e., it will become narrower.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
(xi) The required relation is Stopping potential
EP = 2EK i.e., total energy is negative.

h VS
(xii) The required graph is as shown in the fig. Slope of this line gives us the value of .
e
h
= tan or h = e tan frequency

e
(xiii) The minimum energy required to produce electron-positron pair 1.02 MeV. The balance of energy (2.32
1.30
1.02) = 1.30 eV is given to each particle. Energy of each is = 0.65 eV.
2
(xiv) In sky wave propagation, the communication of radio waves in frequency 30 MHz 40 MHz takes place
due to reflection from the ionosphere.
(xv) The photoelectric current will increase but stopping potential will remain the same.
PART-II
SECTION-A
Answer 2.
(a) Let C1 and C2 be the capacities of the two conductors A and B charged to potential V1 and V2. When the two
are joined, charge flows from a conductor at a higher potential to the conductor at lower potential, till they
acquire a common potential V. In the process energy is lost.
Energy stored in A and B before sharing of charge
1 1
Ei = C1V12 + C2 V22 ... (i)
2 2
If V is the common potential, then total energy of A and B after sharing charges is
1
Ef = (C1 + C2 ) V 2 ... (ii)
2
C1V1 + C2V2
where V=
C1 + C2
Loss of energy = Ei Ef
2
1 1 1 C V + C2 V2
= C1V12 + C 2 V22 1 1 (C1 + C 2 )
2 2 2 C1 + C2
1 1 1 C 2 V 2 + C22 V22 + 2C1C 2 V1V2
= C1V12 + C2 V22 1 1
2 2 2 C1 + C 2
1 C1 V1 + C1C2 V1 + C1 V1 + C1C2 V2 + C22 V22 C12 V12 C22 V22 2C1C2 V1V2
2 2 2 2 2 2
=
2(C1 + C2 )
C1C2
= [V 2 + V22 2V1V2 ]
2(C1+ C2 ) 1
C1C2
= [V V2]2,
2(C1+ C2 ) 1
which is always + ve because (V1 V2)2, the square of a quantity is always +ve.
(b) Let F be the force in each case, then
1 q1q2
F= . ... (i)
40 r 2
1 qq
and F= . 1 22 ... (ii)
40 Kr
Comparing (i) and (ii), we get
1 q1q2 1 qq
. 2 = . 1 22
40 r 40 Kr
r = Kr2
2
r= Kr
r
r =
K

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Answer 3.
(a) Let an electric dipole of dipole moment p will be placed at an angle with the +q
p B
direction of the magnetic field E.
It experiences a torque pEsin . This torque tries to set the dipole in the direction
E
of the electric field. However, due to inertia, it overshoots the mean position. It
again experiences a torque trying to bring it back to the mean position. Where it A
q
again overshoot. Thus, it begins to vibrate simple harmonically.
Restoring = pE sin
= pE ... (i), if is small sin = .
If is the angular acceleration produced by the torque, then
= I ... (ii)
I = pE
pE
=
I
Then
Motion is simple harmonic and its time period T is given by
Displacement
T = 2 = 2
Acceleration pE
.
I
I
T = 2 , which is the required expression.
pE
(b) Total emf = E + E = 2E, Total circuit resistance = R + r1 + r2
2E
I= R +r +r
1 2
Potential drop inside the cell of internal resistance r1 = Ir1
Terminal potential difference across this cell
2E
V= E Ir1 = E r1 = E[R + r1 + r2 2r1]
R + r1 + r2
V= E[R + r2 r1]
or 0 = E [R + r2 r1]
R + r2 r1 = 0
R = r1 r2, which is the required relation.
Answer 4.
(a) Let R1, R2, R3 be the resistances of the three lamps connected in series. Then
V2 V2 V2
R1 = , R2 = , R3 =
P1 P2 P3
If P is the effective power and R the resistance of the lamps connected in series, then
V2
R=
P
In series connection
R = R1 + R2 + R3
V2 V2 V2 V2
= + +
P P1 P2 P3
1 1 1 1
= P + P + P i.e., the total power will decrease.
P 1 2 3
(b) In the first case, total resistance of the circuit = 100 + 200 + 300 = 600
60 1
i= = A
600 10
1
p.d. across the 300 resistance = 300 = 30 V
10

EVERGREEN
SERIES
V
100 200 300 100 200 300
60 V
300 300
In the second case, total circuit resistance = 100 + 200 +
600
= 10 + 200 + 150 = 450
E 60 2
1= = = A
R 450 15
2
p.d. across the 300 resistor combination = 150 = 20 V
15
30 20
Error = 100 = 33.33%
30
Answer 5.
(a) Number of cells = N
Number of rows = n A B
Number of cells in one row = m
If E is emf and r the internal resistance of the cell, then
emf of each row = mE
Internal resistance of the cells in one row = mr R
Such n rows are connected in parallel.
Total emf = emf the cells in one row
= mE
Internal resistance of the combination cells
1 1 1
= + + ... n time
R mr mr
1 n
=
R mr
mr
R =
n
mr mr + nR
Circuit resistance = +R =
n n
mE NE
Current I = mr + nR m = mr + nR
Now, for the current to be maximum mr+ nR must be be minimum
Now, mR + nr = [mR nr]2 + 2mnRr
Clearly, mR + nr will be minimum, if
(mr nR)2 = 0
mr = nR
m
R= r
n
NE NE
Imax = =
2mr 2nR
(b) Total potential difference in the circuit = 5 2 = 3 V
Total resistance = 10 + 20 = 30
3V 1
I= = A
30 10
1
p.d. across 20 resistance = 20 =2V
10
p.d. between A and B = 2 + 2 = 4 V
EVERGREEN
SERIES
Answer 6.
v sin
(a) Let a charged particle enter a uniform magnetic field of B with a velocity v at an
angle with the direction of the magnetic field. The velocity v can be resolved

into two rectangular components : (i) v cos (ii) v sin as shown. The magnetic v
field exert a force on the charged moving with a velocity v sin perpendicular to
magnetic field and velocity v sin .
B
v cos
F = Q v sin B
F = Q v B sin
This force supplies the necessary centripetal force. If r is the radius of the circular path, then
mv 2 sin 2
F=
r
mv 2 sin 2
or Q v B sin =
r
mv sin
r=
QB
Time taken by the charged particle to complete one circle
2r 2 mv sin 2 m
T= = =
v sin BQ v sin BQ
Which is independent of v and r. During this time, the charged particle moves in the forward direction. The
path of the particle will be helical and the pitch of the helix will be
= v cos T
2 m 2 m v cos
= v cos =
BQ BQ
(b) The two circular parts of the wire carry current in opposite directions and the magnetic field will be the
difference of the two.
Here, the magnetic field due to the inner wire
1 0 2 I
2 4 r1
B1 =
0 I
= outward at O
4 r1
1 0 2I I
= 0 inward at O.
2 4 r2 4r
and B2 =
2
Net magnetic field B = B1 B2
0I 1 1

4 r1 r2
= outward.
Answer 7.
(a) rms value of an alternating current is defined as that steady value of the current which produces the same
amount of heat in a resistor in a time half the time period of a.c. as is produced by a.c. when flowing through
the same resistor for the same time.
Let I = I0 sin t
Then heat produced by a.c. when flowing through a resistor in a small dt is
dH = I2R dt = I02 sin2t Rdt
T
Heat produced in a time equal to half the time period a.c. i.e,
2
T/2 T/2
I20
H= I02 R sin 2 t dt =
2
R (1 cos 2t ) dt
0 0
T/2
2 sin 2t I20 T I2 T
= I0 R t R 0 0 = 0 R
2 0
= .. (i)
2 2 2 2

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Also, by definition
T
H = I2rms R ... (ii)
2
T I2 RT
I2rms R = 0
2 2 2
I0
Irms = , which is the required relation.
2
5
(b) Here, l = 1.5 m, v = 108 = 30 ms1, BH = 3.6 105 T. If BV is the vertical component of the earths field,
18
then
BV
tan = or BV = 3.6 105 1.036 = 3.73 105 T
BH
Induced emf = BV lv
= 3.73 105 1.5 30 V = 0.00168 V
SECTION-B
Answer 8.
(a) Four Maxwells equations represents the law of electromagnetism.
B
(i) E . dl = t
. ds represent Faradays law of e.m. induction
S

B . dl = 0 (I + ID), where ID= displacement current
This equation gives the relation between current and magnetic field.

B. ds = 0, which tells that free magnetic poles cant exit.

1
B. ds 0
=
Q, where Q is the charge enclosed by the surface.
(b) Here, v = 2 1010 Hz, E0 = 48 Vm1, B0 = ?, c = 3 108 ms1

c 3 108
Now, = = = 1.5 102 m
v 2 1010
E0
Also, =c
B0
E 48
B0 = 0 = = 16 108 T = 1.6 107 T
c 3 108
Answer 9.
(a) (i) The essential difference between polarised and unpolarised light is that in polarised light the vibration
of the electric vector are confined to only one plane containing the direction of incidence whereas in
unpolarised light vibrations of the electric vector can take place in many planes containing the direction
of incidence. When unpolarised light is incident on a polaroid, the intensity of the transmitted light does
not change on the rotation of polaroid. However, the intensity of transmitted light will change if the
incident light is unpolarised.
(ii) We know that = tan ip.
Since depends upon the colour of light, the polarising angle will also depend upon the colour of light.
It will be more for the violet colour than for the red colour.
(iii) The two are mutually perpendicular.
(b) Sunlight scattered by air is partially polarised. This can be verified by making the scattered light incident on a
polaroid. On rotation of the polaroid about the direction of light as axis, the intensity of light transmitted
through the polaroid will decrease from a maxima to a minima.
Answer 10. A
(a) We know that in the case of a prism, if light is incident on face of prism, it suffers
Q
refraction. PQ is the incident ray and RS the emergent ray, QR is the refracted ray. i e
In the case of a prism, we know that r1 r2 R
S
i + e = A + , A = r1 + r2 P
B C

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Now, = i + e A
The angle of deviation depends upon the angle of incidence. The variation of with i is as shown. The
graph shows that as the angle of incidence increases, the angle of deviation first decreases, becomes minimum
and then increases. There is one angle of incidence for which the deviation is minimum.
and then i = e, and r1 = r2
Now, = i + e A
= ( i e )2 + 2 ie A
Clearly, will be minimum, if
( i e )2 = 0
m
or i =e
min = i + i A i
A + min A
i= , and r1 = r2 = r (say), r =
2 2
A + min
sin
sin i 2
Then = = , which is the required relation.
sin r A
sin
2
(b) Optical fibres : An optical path consists of a glass or a plastic
core. It is surrounded by a cladding made of a similar material cladding
but of a lower refractive index as shown. PQ is called a light pipe

as it allows light to pass through it from the end P to Q. It makes
Q
use of the phenomenon of total internal reflection. Light entering P
at one face is refracted and proceeds to suffer total internal emergent light
incident light
reflection as it is going from denser to rarer medium. It suffers a
number of internal reflections before it emerges out at the other
end. Thus, the path of light can be made to bend although it
travels in a straight line.
Uses :
1. It is used in optical communication.
2. It is used in endoscopy.
Answer 11.
(a) Compound microscope
Eye lens
Objective lens O
B
A A
A Fo C Fo Fe C
ue fo B
B ue
Ve
D
v0 D
Magnifying power M= 1 + f
u0 e
100
(b) (i) Here, fe = = 10 cm
10
100
f0 = = 100 cm
1
f 0 100
Magnifying power = f = 10 = 10
e
(ii) Length of the telescope = f0 + fe

= 100 + 10 = 110 cm, in normal adjustment

EVERGREEN
SERIES
SECTION-C
Answer 12.
(a) The required graphs are as shown in the fig.
iP iP Stopping potential
I2
I2 > I1
I1 M1 M2
VS
(i) ve +ve
(ii) (iii)
anode potential anode potential frequency
(b) To get the largest wavelength in the Lyman series, the energy must be least. The transition take place from
higher energy levels to ground state.
For maximum wavelength
nf = 1, ni = 2
13.6
Ef = 13.6 eV, Ei = = 3.4 eV
4
Energy emitted during this transition = 3.4 (13.6) = 10.2 eV
= 10.2 1.6 1019 J
hc
= 10.2 1.6 1019

6.6 1034 3 108 6.6 3
= 19
= 103 = 1213
10.2 1.6 10 10.2 1.6
Answer 13.
(a) The labelled diagram of a nuclear reactor is given below :
Control
Rods
Steam
heat exchange
Uranium rods
Cold water
moderator
Coolant
Concrete shield
235
1. Fuel rods : Uranium enriched with 92 U is used as a fuel. It is contained in uranium tubes. The uranium is
bombarded with slow neutrons to start the fission reaction.
2. Moderator : The main function of a moderator is to slow down the neutrons. The common moderator are
Deuterium, Paraffin and heavy water.
3. Control rods : The control rods are used to control the rate at which the fission reaction takes place. This is
done usually with the help of cadmium rods which absorb neutrons whenever they are in excess. The position
of the rod can be adjusted.
4. Coolant : The coolant takes up the energy which is produced in the nuclear fission and passes it on to the
water in a heat exchanger. Superheated steam is used to drive a turbine which in its own turn drives the shaft
of a generator.
5. Shield : It is a thick concrete shield used to prevent the harmful effect of the radiation produced during the
nuclear reaction.
(b) (i) The source of solar energy is the fusion reaction going on the sun. One such reaction is the fusion of
hydrogen nuclei going on the sun. Since the two nuclei are + ve charged there exists a large repulsive
force between them. These nuclei will fuse together only if they possess sufficiently high energy and
are able to overcome repulsion. At such high temperature the matter exists in the form of plasm i.e.,
ionised state. One such fusion is
1
1H + 11H + 11H + 11H
42 He + 2e+01 + Q
where Q is the energy released in the process.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
(ii) The atoms of an element which have the same atomic number but different mass number are called
isotopes e.g., 105 B and 115 B are isotopes. Most elements are mixture of two isotopes.
The atoms of an element which have the same mass number but different atomic numbers are called
isobars.
Answer 14.
(a) Compton effect is the phenomenon due to which the wavelength of the scattered radiation by an element is
slightly greater than that of the incident radiation. It is observed that the change in wavelength of the scattered
radiation depends upon the change in direction of the scattered radiation. It is explained on the basis of the
collision between the photon, (a packet of energy and matter) and an electron. When a photon strikes an
electron its direction of motion changes. The electron proceeds in the direction making an angle with the
direction of incident photon. A part of energy is given by the photon to the electron. A a result its own
energy decreases and its wavelength increases. In this collision, which is elastic, the law of conservation of
energy and momentum hold good. If and are wavelengths of incident and scattered radiation, then small
change in wavelength
h
= = (1 cos ),
m0c
where = angle between directions of incident and scattered radiation.
m0 = rest mass of the electron
Clearly, if = 0, cos 0 = 1
h
= m c (1 1) = 0
0
i.e., there is no change of wavelength in the direction of incidence.
If = 90, cos 90 = 0
h h
= m c (1 0) = m c
0 0
This is the maximum change in wavelength observed and is called the compton effect.
(b) (i) When the potential difference between the cathode and anticathode in the coolidge tube is increased,
the electron emitted by the cathode are accelerated to high velocities and produced X-ray of high energy
i.e., hard X-rays i.e., X-rays of high penetrating power. The X-rays of short wavelength are produced.
(ii) The intensity of X-rays does not change because the number of electrons remains the same.
Answer 15.
(a) (i) The transmission of signal using ground wave propagation is limited to frequencies less than 1500 KHz.
As the waves travel along the ground, they get attenuated i.e., their strength decreases due to absorption
of the signal by ground. The attenuation is more for high frequency signals. This puts a limit on the
frequency.
(iii) In sky wave propagation, the signals are shot towards the atmosphere. They are reflected back by the
ionosphere and received back on the earth. Sky wave propagation is limited to a frequency range
230 MHz. T.V. signal have a high frequency. The ionosphere is transparent to them and thus they are
not reflected back and cant be received on the earth.
Collector
(b) A npn-transistor is CE configuration is shown in the fig.
An npn-transistor consist of p-type crystal and sandwitched between two Base
n-type crystal.The central p-type crystal is called the base and the others
on its sides are emitter and collector respectively. The emitter-base Emitter
function is forward biased and collector base function is reverse biased.
The base is thin and lightly doped as compared to the base.
When a forward bias is applied across emiter base junction, the electrons are pushed into the base. Since the
p-region is thin and is lightly doped, most of the electrons diffuse through it and are able to reach the collector.
Only 5% of the electrons are lost by recombination with the holes. The remaining 95% of electrons cross over
to the collector. For each electron lost in the collector region, fresh covalent bond break in the emitter region
which again move towards the collector and the holes are neutralised by more electrons entering the emitter
from the ve terminal of the battery or the VCB battery. The current both inside and outside the transistor is
carried by the electrons.

EVERGREEN
SERIES

PART-I
Answer 1.
1 V2 1 12 300 300
(A) (i) (b) Energy density = 0 2 = 8.85 10
2 d 2 2 10 3 2 10 3
= 0.099 J/m3
(ii) (b) Resistivity remains the same and resistance becomes 1.21 times.
+q
(iii) (c) M = J , the ratio depends upon charge and mass.
2m
(iv) (a) The combination will be combination of a double convex lens and a plano concave lens. Hence,
power will decrease.
(v) (a) Since charge number acquires its original value, 1-particle and 2 -particles will be emitted.
(B) (i) No, because if we go on giving charge to a capacitor, potential will go on increasing and the strong
electric field will ionize the medium between the plates or rupture it.
(ii) If P is increased, the current through the arm AB will decrease. As a result the pd across AB will decrease,
thus, increasing the potential of B. The current will flow from B to D.
(iii) According to colour code, the resistance will be 12 103 10% .
Ne it 10 3 1
(iv) i= ,N= = = 6.25 1015
t e 1.6 10 19

(v) Application of F = q ( B) gives the direction of B along east.
(vi) The suspended body will start vibrating up and down.
f0 f 120
(vii) M = , fe = 0 = =3
fe M 2
20
(viii) The focal length of a short-sighted eye is less. Its focal length must be increased to see far off objects. A
concave lens of suitable focal length must be used.
(ix) The focal length of the combination of the given two lenses will be
f1 f 2
F=
f1 + f 2 d
Clearly, F will be negative if d > (f1 + f2).
(x) The deviation is least for the red colour.
(xi) When the intensity of the incident light increases, the number of photons increases. Each photon ejects
one electron. As a result the number of ejected electrons and hence photoelectric current increases.
High frequency only increases the energy of the ejected electrons and not their number.
1 1
rAu
(xii) (a) = A1 3 = (1) 3 = 1
rAg A
2
(b) Since the nuclear density is the same, therefore, the nuclear density is 1.
(xiii) Depletion layer is a layer formed when the p-type crystal and n-type crystal are formed due to the diffusion
of electrons and holes. Depletion layer is devoid of any charges.
(xiv) y =A+A. B
A
A Y = A + A.B
B A.B
AND gate OR gate
An AND gate and an OR gate are combined as shown to get the logic of the given Boolean expression.
(xv) Demodulation is the process of separating the audio signal from the radio frequency modulated signal.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
PART-II
SECTION-A
Answer 2.
(a) The Van de Graff generator is based on the following two principles.
(i) The corona discharge.
(ii) When a charged conductor is placed in contact with the inside of a hollow conductor, all of the charge
of the first conductor is transferred to the hollow conductor. The charge on the hollow conductor can be
increased without limit by repeating the process.
A labelled schematic sketch is as shown below :
+ + + Conducting
+ +
+ + shell
+ +
Collecting
+ +
comb C2
+
+ + + Steel
+ + + enclosure
+ + +
+
+
+ Insulating
+ column
+
+
+
Spray +
comb C1 +
+
R.T.
Target T
Working : Due to high density of positive charge at the sharp points of the teeth of the comb C1,
positive charge is sprayed on the belt (Corona discharge). As the belt is rotated by the electric motor,
these positive ions move upward along with the belt. A negative charge is induced on the sharp teeth of
the collecting comb C2 and an equal positive charge is induced on the farther end of the comb C2. This
positive charge shifts to the outer surface of the conducting shell S. Due to Corona discharge at the
sharp teeth of comb C2 a negatively charged electric wind is set-up. This neutralises the positive charge
on the belt. This process continues and sphere goes on getting more and more of positive charge.
(b) Here, = 0 1 r , r is the distance of the point from the centre.

R
Consider a small spherical shell of radius r and thickness dr.
Volume of the shell = 4r2dr
Charge on the shell = 4r2dr = 4r2dr 0 1

r

R
R R
r r3
Total charge on the sphere Q = 40 r 2 1 dr = 40 r 2 dr
R R
0 0
3 4 R 3 3 1
= 40 r r = 40 R R = 40R3
3 4R 0 3 4 12
40 3
Q= R
3
Assuming the charge to be concentrated at the centre of the sphere, the electric field E at a distance r from
the centre
1 Q 1 40 R 3 0 R 3
E= . 2 = . = .
40 r 4 0 3r 2 3 0 r 2
Answer 3.
(a) Thermo emf as a function of is given by
E = 14 0.022

EVERGREEN
SERIES
(i) At the neutral temperature E is maximum

dE
=0
d
dE
= 14 0.04 = 0
d
0.04 = 14
14
= = 350C
0.04
(ii) If i is the temperature of inversion, then
+ i
n = c
2
i = 2n i = 700 20 = 680C +q B
(b) Let a dipole AB formed by two charges q and + q be placed in a uniform
electric field placed at an angle with the direction of electric field. The
p
dipole possesses potential energy because work had to be done to take

the dipole in this position. Let at any time be the angle between p and
E

the direction of the electric field E .
Then torque acting on the dipole is pE sin , work done in further turning q
it, through a small angle d. A
dW = pE sin d
Total work done in turning the dipole through an angle is

W= pE sin d = pE [cos ]0 = pE [cos 1]
0
= pE [1 cos ], which is the required expression.
Answer 4.
(a) Let there be n cells each of internal resistnce r and R the external resistance.
Total emf of all the cells in parallel = emf of a single cell E, r
=E
Total internal resistance R of all the cells connected in parallel is E, r
1 1 1 1 n
= + + = E, r
R r r r r
r
R =
n R
r
Total circuit resistnace = R +
n
E
Current through the load =
r
R+
n
r E
Now, if R >> , then = I i.e., the current is the same as that sent by one cell.
n R
Parallel grouping of cells in this case is not desirable.
(b) The circuit may be redrawn without changing the resistance as shown. Breaking the circuit at C does not
change the potential at C.
R R
R R R R
C R R R 2 R
A B 2R R
R C R 3
A B
A R R B 2R
(i) (ii) (iii)
The circuit may further be reduced to (ii).

EVERGREEN
SERIES
From fig. (iii) the final effective resistance is given by

8
R 2R
3 16 R 2 8
Reff = 8 = = R
R + 2R 14 R 7
3
Answer 5.
(a) A slide wire bridge is an arrangement to measure the unknown resistane. It is based on the wheatstone bridge
principle i.e., in a balanced wheatstone bridge
P R
=
Q S
A labelled circuit diagram of a metre bridge is as shown in the fig. Unknown
resistance
R.B. Resistance box
R X
D Cu
strips
Galvanometer G
A Bridge wire C
Jockey
B
L cm (100 L) cm
+
Cell E K key
(b) The unknown resistance is placed in the arm CD of the bridge.

A suitable resistance R is taken out from the resistance box R. The jockey is slided over the wire and the
balance point is located on the wire. This is shown by no deflection in the galvanometer. In this position
R Resistance of the wire between A and B
=
X Resistance of the wire between B and C
If l1 is the balancing length of the slide wire bridge, then
R l
=
X (100 l )
where is the resistance per cm of the wire
R l
=
X 100 l
100 l
X= R. , from where X can be determined.
l
(b) Current sensitivity is defined as the deflection produced per unit current. If is the deflection produced in
the galvanometer by a current i, then current sensitivity is given by

Si = , larger the value of Si , more is the current sensitivity.
I
Similarly, voltage sensitivity is given by

Sv = ,
V
where V is the voltage applied across the galvanometer to produce a deflection . If i is the current and R the
resistance of the voltmeter, then V = IR
S
Sv = = i
iR R

Now , Sv =
i
Also, in a galvanometer NAB
= i
k
NAB
=
i k
NAB
or Si = .
k
Clearly, current sensitivity can be increased by :
(i) increasing the number of turns in the coil.
(ii) increasing the face area of the coil.
(iii) increasing the strength of the magnetic field.
(iv) decreasing couple per unit twist.
Sensitivity cannot be increased beyond a certain limit. Increasing N increases the resistance which decreases
the voltage sensitivity. Increasing A makes the galvanometer unwieldy.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Answer 6.
(a) Consider a circular loop of wire of radius R located in the YZ plane and carrying a steady current I as shown
in figure below. Let us calculate the magnetic field at an axial point P a distance x from the centre of the loop.
^
From the figure, it is clear that any element dL is perpendicular to r , furthermore, all the elements around the
loop are the same distance r from P, where r2 = x2 + R2. Hence, by Biot-Savarts law, the magnetic field at
point P due to the current element dL is given by
^
0 I | dL r | 0 I dL
dB = = 4 2 ... (i)
4 r 2 (x + R 2 )
^
The direction of the magnetic field dB due to the element dL is perpendicular to the plane formed by r and
dL as shown in figure above. The vector dB can be resolved into
y
components dBx along the X-axis and dBy which is perpendicular
to the X-axis. When the components perpendicular to the X-axis dL r
I
are assumed over the whole loop, the result is zero. By symmetry
any element on one side of the loop will set up a perpendicular R r dBy
component that cancels the component set-up by an element O dB
diametrically opposite it. Therefore, it is obvious that the resultant x
I
magnetic field at P will be along the X-axis. The resultant can be dBx
obtained by integrating the components dBx = dB cos .
Therefore, we have
I dL cos
B = dB cos = 0 2 ... (ii)
4 x + R2
where the integral is to be taken over the entire loop since , x and R are constants for all elements of the
loop and since
R
cos = , therefore, we have
x + R2
2
0 IR 0 IR 0 IR 2
B=
4 (x 2 + R 2 )3/2
dt =
4 (x 2 + R 2 )3/2
. 2R =
2( x 2 + R 2 )3 / 2
(b) Here, r = 4 mm = 4 103 m
I1 = 50 A,
mass of the wire Q = 0.075 Nm1, I2 = ?
To support the wire Q, the wire P must exert a force of repulsion on Q equal to its weight. Let a current I2 pass
through the wire Q in a direction opposite to that of P.
F 0 2I1I2
Then = . = mg = wt. per unit length
l 4 r
10 7 2 50 I2 Q
I2
or = 0.075
4 10 3 3
0.075 4 10 4 mm
I2 = = 30 A
107 100 P
Answer 7. 50 A
(a) Let a current I amp be passed through the coil S1 having n1 turns per unit length and face area A of the coil.
The magnetic field B produced by this current along the axis of the coil is given by
B = 0nI
This magnetic field is perpendicular to the face area of the solenoid. If N is the number of turns in it and l its
length, then the total magnetic flux linked with the solenoid is
= N2BA = N2 0n1IA
= n2l 0n1IA
If M is the coefficient of mutual inductance between the two coils, then

M=
I
M = 0 n1n2 lA
Clearly, M depends upon :
(i) number of turns per unit length of the solenoid n1 and n2.
(ii) face area of the coil.
(iii) permeability of the medium on which the colils are wound.
(iv) length of the solenoid.
EVERGREEN
SERIES
(b) It is the case of an LCR circuit. 5

Here, R = 40 , L = 3 103 H, C = , 106 F

Ev = 230 V, Iv = ?
= 2 50 = 100
3 3.14
L = 3 103 100 = is ~ 1 ohm
10
1 1
= 5 = 2000
C 106 2 50
1
Clealry L << and is hence neglected
C
2
2 1
z= R + = (2000) 2 + (40) 2 = 2000.4
C
Ev 230
Iv = = = 0.115 A
z 2000.4
SECTION-B
Answer 8.
(a) Concept of displacement current : When a capacitor is charged through a resistor, a current flows through
the circuit. However, we know that a capacitor is a complete block for d.c. How is the continuity of current
maintained ? Actually, it is the displacement current which maintains the flow of current. Just as a varying
magnetic field produces a varying electric field, a varying electric field also produces a magnetic field and
hence a varying current. This current which is produced by the varying electric field is called the displacement
current and it lasts only as long as the electric field between the plates of the capacitor varies.
dQ d dV d E C dE
The current Id = = (CV) = C =C =
dt dt dt dt x x dt
When V becomes constant, Id = 0.
Actually, it is (I + Id) which is continuous where I is the conduction current. Outside the capacitor id = 0 and
inside the capacitor I = 0.
(b) Consider a plane wavefront AB incident obliquely on a plane reflecting surface MM. Let a plane wavefront
AB with the end A of the wavefront strike the mirror at an angle I but the other end B has to cover distance
BC
BC, time required for this will be t = , where c is the velocity of light.
c
According to Huygens principle point A starts emitting 2
B D 1
secondary wavelets and in time t, these will cover a distance
ct = BC and spread. Hence, with point A as centre and BC as
radius, draw a circular arc. Draw tangent CD on this arc from the 1 r
i
point C. Obviously, CD is the reflected wavefront inclined at an i r 2
angle r. As incident wavefront and reflected wavefront both are M A C M

in the plane of paper, 1st law of reflection is proved.
To prove second law of reflection, consider ABC and ADC. BC = AD (by construction)
ABC= ADC = 90
and AC is common.
Therefore, the two triangles are congruent and hence, BAC = DCA or i = r i.e., the angle of reflection
is equal to the angle of incidence, which is the second law of reflection.
Answer 9.
(a) Let the waves from the two coherent sources be represented by
y 1 = a sin t ... (i)
y 2 = b (t + )

= b sin t + + = b sin (t + ), = +
2 2
According to the principle of superposition
y = y1 + y2 = a sin t + b sin (t + ) = a sin t + b [sin t cos + cos t sin ]
y = sin t [a + b cos ] + b sin cos t ... (i)
Put a + b cos = A cos ... (ii)
and b sin = A sin ... (iii)
With these substitutions in (i)
y = A sin t cos + A sin cos t
= A sin (t + ), where A and satisfy relations (ii) and (iii)
EVERGREEN
SERIES
The resulting wave in thus a simple harmonic wave of amplitude A and new phase angle .
Squaring (ii) and (iii), we get
(a + b cos )2 + b2 sin2 = A2
or A= a 2 + b2 + 2ab cos ... (iv)

b sin
and tan =
a + b cos
Thus A = a2 + b2 + 2ab cos
2

A 2 = a2 + b2 + 2ab cos +
2
A 2 = a2 + b2 2ab sin ... (v)
Condition for Maxima :
3 7
The amplitude and hence intensity will be maxima = if sin = 1 = sin , = sin (2n + 1) ,
2 2 2
where n = 1, 3, 5

or p = (2n + 1) p = .
4 2
Condition for minima : Intensity of light will be minimum

If sin = + 1 = sin (4n + 1) , n = 0, 1, 2
2

= (4n + 1)
2
2
p= = . (4n + 1) = (4n + 1)
2 2 2 4
(b) Here, D = 25 cm, a = 2 mm = 2 103 m = 0.25 m, = 6000 1010 = 6 107 m
We know that width of the central maxima is
D 2 6 107 0.25
= 2 = = 1.5 104 m = 0.15 mm
a 2 10 3
Answer 10.
(a) The labelled ray diagram by which the image of a distant object is formed A B
by a reflecting telescope is given below
B
A
M1
(b) According to the lens formula M2 Distant object
1 1 1
= , where the letters have their usual meanings.
v u f A B
Now, for a concave lens u and f are ve

Applying sign convention, we get
E Eyepiece
1 1 1
+ =
v u f
1 1 1
=
v f u
1 u + f
=
v uf
uf
v=
u+ f
Clearly, v is always ve. Further, since u <1
u+ f
v<f (numerically)
Thus, the image is virtual, erect and is always formed within the focus of the concave lens whatever be the
value of u.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Answer 11.
(a) A spherical surface has two focal lengths and hence two foci.
First principal focus F1 : It is the point on the principal axis such that
the rays of light starting from this point are rendered parallel to the
principal axis after refraction through the spherical surface. The distance F1 P
of F1 from P is called the first focal f1 i.e., f1 = PF1.
Second principal focus F2 : It is a point on the principal axis where a
beam of light coming parallel to the principal axis converges or appears
to diverge. The distance of F2 from the pole of the spherical surface is
called second principal focal length f2 i.e., f2 = PF2.
Relation : For a spherical surface when refraction takes place from a medium P
of refractive index 1 to a medium of refractive 2 we know that F2

1+ 2 = 2 1
u v R
Now, when U = f1, v =
1 +0 = 2 1
f1 R
1R
or f1 = ... (i)
2 1
Further, when u = , v = f2
1+ 2 = 2 1
f2 R
2 R
f2 = ... (ii)
2 1
Dividing (i) by (ii) f1
= 1
f2 2
(b) Consider a point object O lying on the principal axis of a coaxial
A B
pair of lenses A and B of focal lengths, f1 and f2 in combination.
The image of the object O is formed at I at a distance v after
refraction through the combination. This image may be thought I1
v I
of as being formed in two stages. The lens A first forms the O u
v1
image of the object at O at I1. The image I1 then serves as a
f1 f2
virtual object for the second lens giving rise to a real image at
I. Let F be the focal length of the combination.
For refraction at the lens A of the focal length f1 according to lens formula,
1 1 1 1 1 1
= , we get = ... (i)
v u f v1 u f1
For the lens B, u = v1 and v = v and f = f2
By lens formula
1 1 1

v v1 = f ... (ii)
2
and for the combination
1 1 1
= ... (iii)
v u F
Adding (i) and (ii), we get
1 1 1 1 1 1
+ = +
v1 u v v1 f1 f 2
1 1 1 1
or = +
v u f1 f 2
1 1 1 1 1 1
or = + =
F f1 f 2 v u F
1 f + f2
= 1
F f1 f 2
f1 f 2
F=
f1 + f 2

EVERGREEN
SERIES
SECTION-C
Answer 12.
(a) In the fig. is shown an electron of mass m moving in a circular path of radius r around the proton carrying a
charge +e. The electrostatic force supplies the necessary centripetal force.
mv 2 1 e2
=
r 40 r 2
e2
mv2 = k . ... (i)
r
1
Where k = 4 v
0
Further, since the angular momentum is quantised
r
(e)
nh (+e)
mvr =
2
nh
v= ... (ii)
2mr
Putting this value of v in (i), we get
m.n 2 h 2 ke 2
=
4 2 m 2 r 2 r
n 2h 2
r= ... (iii)
42 m ke2
The electrons revolving around the nucleus possess both kinetic and potential energies and their sum is
equal to the total energy of the electron.
kq1q2 e2
Now, P.E. = = k ... (iv)
r r
1 2 1 e2
and K.E. = mv = k
2 2 r
2
e 2 k .e2 = ke = ke 42 mke2
2
Total energy = k +
r 2r 2r 2n 2 h 2
2 2 mk 2 e4
Total energy, En =
n 2h2
1
Clearly, En
n2
As we go from the inner orbit to the outer orbit, the energy increases. It decreases numerically but because of
the negative sign it increases.
(b) Here, 0 = 4000 = 4 107 m
= 2000 = 2 107 m
= 2000 = 2 107 m
c 6.62 1034 3 108
Work function of the metal = h = eV = 3.09 eV
0 4 107 1.6 1019
c 6.6 1034 3 108
Energy of the incident photon = h = eV = 6.18 eV
2 107 1.6 1019
Energy imparted to the ejected electron is = 6.18 3.09 = 3.09 eV
Answer 13.
(a) Let the nucleus be ZXA, clearly it contains. Z = protons and (A Z) neutrons
Let Mx be the mass of the nucleus and
mp = mass of the proton
mn = mass of the neutron
Total mass of the constituents of the nucleus
= Zmp + (A Z) mn
Mass defect m = Zmp + (A Z) mn MX

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Total binding energy of the nucleus

B.E. = mc2 = [Zmp+ (A Z) mn MX]c2
Average binding energy
B.E. (Zmp + (A Z) mn M X ) c 2
=
A A
(b) Pair production : It is an example of materialisation of Positron
energy when an energetic -ray photon falls on a heavy (+1 0)
substance. The nucleus of the substance absorbs the +
photon and its energy gives rise on an electron
position pair as shown. This process in which energy
Nuclears
is converted into mass under suitable conditions is - ray photon Electron
called pair production. This is represented as ( 1 0)
0 0
hv +
1 +1
We know that the rest mass energy of both electron and positron is 0.51 MeV.
The incident photon must have at least an energy of 0.51 MeV + 0.51 MeV = 1.02 MeV. If the energy of the
photon is less than this, it may cause photoelectric effect but not pair production. If the energy of the photon
is more than 1.02 MeV, the excess energy is equally shared between the two.
Answer 14.
(a) On the basis of conclusions reached from Rutherford experiment, an atomic model known as Rutherford model
was proposed. This model has the following important characteristics.
1. An atom consists of a central nucleus in which the whole of the mass and the whole of the +ve charge is
concentrated. This small region is called the nucleus.
2. Since the atom as a whole is neutral it contains an equal of ve charge.
3. The ve charge is carried by the electrons all around the nucleus but is separated from it.
4. The electrons revolve around the nucleus in circular orbits. The electrostatic force between the nucleus
and the electrons supplies the necessary centripetal force.
5. Most of the space around the nucleus is empty.
Failure of the Rutherford Model :
(i) The motion of the electrons around the nucleus is accelerated motion. According to electromagnetic
theory, an accelerated charge must radiate energy. As a result, its energy decreases gradually.
Consequently it should revolve continuously in circle of decreasing radius and fall into the nucleus.
Actually, however, the orbit in which the electron revolves is stable.
(ii) As the electron revolves around the nucleus, it must continuously emit radiation of all frequencies.
Actually, however, elements emit lines of definite frequencies different from the frequency produced by
Rutherford model.
(b) Q value of the nuclear reaction = 5.42 MeV
210 210 4
Po Pb + He + Q
84 82 2
Since initial momentum is zero, final momentum must also be zero.
210
Momentum of -particle and Pb are equal and opposite.
82
p2
Now, K.E. = , since p is the same for both the them
2m
1
K.E.
m
K Pb m 4
K = mPb = 206 ... (i)
Also, KPb + K = 5.42 MeV
Adding 1 to both sides of equation
K Pb + K 4 210
= +1 =
K 206 206
5.42 210
K = 206
5.42 206
K = = 5.317 Mev = 5317 KeV
210

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Answer 15.
Vce = 2V 4V
Input characteristics for a common emitter configuration of a n-p-n
transistor is the graph between Vbe along the x-axis and Ib along the Ib
E
y-axis keeping Vce constant. These curves at different Vce voltage are as D
shown in the fig. Ib Vce = 4V
F C
From the graph, we can find the input resistance
Vbe OB OC A Vb B
Ri = I = O Vbe
b OE OF
It is clear from the graph that even a small change in the Vbe can bring about a large change in the base
current. Therefore, input resistance is low.
Output characteristics of an n-p-n transistor is a graph between collector current Ic and Vce with Ic takes
along the y-axis and Vce taken along the x-axis keeping Ib constant. The shape of such curves is as shown in
the fig.
The reciprocal of slope of the Vce Ic curve at any point gives us the output resistance at that point
Vce OB OA
R0 = =
Ic I = constant OF OE
b
It is clear from the graph that a large change in Vce is able to bring out a small change in the collector current.
Vce
R0 = is quite high. This output resistor is very high.
Ic F D
Ic
Thus, we see that the input resistance of an n-p-n transistor is low but C
E
the output resistance is high. This helps us to make the transistor acts as
an amplifier. VCE
B
O A Vce
(b) NAND gates alone can be used to produce the logic of an OR gate. When two inputs of a NAND gate are
connected, it behaves as a NOT gate.
The two NOT gates are first used to A and B . These two then form inputs of the NAND gate.
A
A
Y = A.B = A + B
Y
B
B NAND
Truth Table
A B A B Y1 = A . B Y = Y1
0 0 1 1 1 0
0 1 1 0 0 1
1 0 0 1 0 1
1 1 0 0 0 1
The above is the truth Table of an OR gate.

EVERGREEN
SERIES

PART-I
Answer 1.
1 e2
(A) (i) (a) The P.E. = for the electron-proton pair. If r is decreased, P.E. will decrease, although
40 r
numerically it will increase.
V2 1 1
(ii) (c) P = . Clearly, when V becomes , the power will decrease to th of orignial power i.e., 25 W.
R 2 4
(iii) > , the angle of dip increases if we observe in a plane different from the magnetic meridian.
(iv) (c) In terms of R, wave number for Balmer series for transition for n = 3 to n = 2,
5
v = R
36
1 1 1
(v) (c) = ( 1)
f R1
F 20 cm ray
1 1 0.5
= 0.5 =
f 10 10
f = 20 cm
For an object placed at F, the emergent ray will be parallel to the principal axis.
Radius of curvature of concave mirror = 20 cm
20
f= = 10 cm
2
Q
(B) (i) V1 =
C1
Q
V1 =
C1
Q
V2 = C
2
V1 C2
V2 = C1
(ii) The potentiometer method is a null method. Whereas the voltmeter measures only the potential difference
and not the emf of the cell.
(iii) Here, no current flows 1 1 combination.
Total circuit resistance = 2 + 4 = 6
3
Current through the battery = = 0.5 A
6
(iv) Force acting on the cosmic rays entering the atmosphere near the North and South pole is very small

F = q (V B) . Thus, force is maximum on the cosmic ray particles near the equator and hence they
are scattered away.
(v) The final velocity will remain the same because the magnetic field does not bring about any change in
K.E. The force always acts perpendicular to the direction of motion. B
(vi) In an LCR circuit
1 2 C
Z = L + R
C

1 O
At resonance r = IvR
LC
A
1
If > r, L > and circuit will be inductive. The V I graph will be as shown.
C
1 1 1
(vii) Since the radii of the two curved surfaces are equal and +ve, = ( 1) =0
f R1 R 2
P =0
(viii) A rainbow is observed due to the dispersion and total internal reflection of light rays from the sun.
(ix) When the wavelength of the light is decreased the width of the fringes decreases. Hence, the same
distance on the screen now contains larger number of fringes.
EVERGREEN
SERIES
If n1 and n2 is the number of waves contained in the same distance x

D D
x = n1 1 or x = n2 2 , n11 = n22,
d d
600
n 2 = 12 = 18
400
(x) Geometrical path is the length of the actual path covered by light in air in the same time for which it
travels in the medium. If v and c is the velocity of light in the medium and air.
The optical path, x = v t
Geometrical path y=ct
y c
= =
x v
Geometrical path = times the optical path
(xi) Let E1 and E2 be the kinetic energy in the two cases then
hv = 0 + E1 ...(i)
and 2hv = 0 + E2 ...(ii)
From (i) and (ii)
0 + E2 = 20 + 2E1
or E2 = 0 + 2E1
Thus, E2will be more than doubled.
E hc h 6.6 10 34
(xii) p= = = = = 13.2 1028 kgms1
c c 500 10 9
(xiii) Both the electron and positron have a rest mass energy of 0.51 MeV. The energy of the photon must be
0.51 MeV + 0.51 MeV = 1.02 MeV
I IC R L
(xiv) A.C. current gain, p = C , and voltage gain = .
IB IB .R1
RL
=.
R1
(xv) This is so because microwaves are not diffracted much on account of their small wavelength.
PART-II
SECTION-A
Answer 2.
(a) When a dielectric of polar or non-polar molecules is placed in an electric
field, they acquire dipole moments. In the case of non-polar molecule where
the centres of +ve and ve charges coincide, these get displaced and the
molecules become polar. In the case of polar molecules like water, where
even individual molecules have dipole moments, the molecules get aligned
and the specimen of such molecules develope dipole moments. The i
specimen is said to be polarised as shown and it develops dipole moments. E
Polarisation is measured by the dipole moments developed per unit volume.
Induced ve and +ve charges are produced on the two faces of the dielectric giving rise to an electric field in
a direction opposite to that of the field, thus weakening the field inside the dielectric.

Polarisation vector P has the direction of the applied electric field. It can show that polarisation is numerically
equal to the surface density of the induced charges when placed in the electric field i.e., P = i as shown
below.
Induced dipole moments = qi l, where l is the length of the dielectric slab
Volume of the slab = A l, A being the surface area of the slab.
Dipole moment qi l qi
Polarisation = = = = i
Volume Al A
Units of polarisation is C m2.
(b) In the case of a conical conductor or a conductor having pointed ends, the charge tends to leak. This is
because the charge density is much more at the pointed ends. The air particles which come in contact with
the pointed ends are charged and are repelled away carrying the charge. Thus, an electric wind is set-up near
the pointed ends. As a result the conductor gets discharged. However, in the case of a sphere the charge
density is uniform as there are no pointed ends. It thus does not lose the charge that quickly.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Answer 3.
(a) (i) We know that electric intensity at a point is the negative of the potential gradient at that point
dV dV
E= or dr =
dr E
Clearly, the distance dr between two equipotential surfaces, if dV is fixed is inversely proportional to E
1
dr
E
Near the charge, E is quite large and hence dr is small. Thus, the equipotential surfaces are closer.
(ii) The electric intensity at a point along the surface of a charged conductor is Normal
zero. If possible, let E make an angle with the normal to the surface. We can
E
resolve E into two components : (i) E cos along the normal and (ii) E sin
along the surface. But there is no field along surface.
E sin = 0
or =0
E is along the normal to the surface.
(b) Effective resistances of all the three resistances connected in parallel is given by
1 1 1 1 11 10
= + + =
R 10 20 30 60 20
A B
60
R= 22 A 30
11
60
Potential difference across the combination is = 22 = 120 V
11
This potential difference exists across each resistor in the combination.
120
I1 = = 12 A
10
120
I2 = = 6A
20
120
I3 = = 4A
30
Answer 4.
(a) Difference between emf and potential difference of a cell.
Following are some of the points of difference between emf and potential difference :
emf Potential difference

1. It is a term used for sources of current. 1. It is applied to the difference of potential
between any two points in a circuit.
2. It is defined as the work done in moving a unit 2. It is defined as the work done in moving a unit
charge through the source from low potential +ve charge from the low potential to the high
to the high potential. potential.
3. It is the potential differnce across the terminals 3. It is the potential difference across the terminals
of the cell when it is in an open circuit. of the cell in a closed circuit.
4. E > V 4. V < E but V > E if the cell is being charged from
an external source.
(b) We know that V

Ee
vd =
m
A B
V
and R= L
I
V
(i) When the length of the conductor is made three time keeping V constant, then E = , the electric
L
1
inensity is reduced to rd of its original value. Hence, the drift velocity will become less.
3
(ii) Resistance is directly proportional to its length, hence the resistance will become three times.
(iii) Resistivity will remain the same because it depends upon the nature of the material of the conductor.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Answer 5.
10 1
(a) Let us take emf of the battery = 10 V. Then current through the part ABC of the circuit = = A and
60 6
10
current through the point ADC of the circuit = = 0.5 A B
20 40

1 20
P.D. between A and B = 20 = 3.33 V
6
A C
Potential of B = 10 3.33 = 6.67 V
VB = 6.67 V 6

Also, VA VD = 6 .5 = 3 V 14
D
VD = 10 3 = 7 V
VD is at the higher potential. 10 V
If B and D are connected, current will flow from D to B.
There will be no deflection in the galvanometer if the points B and D are
the same potential. P R
i.e. =
Q S
20 7 1
If we put a resistance of 1 in series in the arm AD, then bridge will be balanced = = and there
40 14 2
will be no deflection in the galvanometer.
(b) In the fig. below is shown the plot of a bar magnet with the north of the magnet pointing towards north of the
earth.
The neutral points in this case be on the equatorial line as shown.
N
W E
S
N
If B is the magnetic field at the neutral point and BH is the horizontal component of the earthss field, then at
0 M Y
the neutral point B = BH or . = BH, from where M can be determined.
4 r 3 F1
A
Answer 6. B B
I
(a) Consider a rectangular current loop ABCD carrying a current I ampere N I F4
placed in a uniform magnetic field B as shown. Let be the angle between
the normal to coil and direction of the magnetic field. Let a be the B
B

length of the rectangular loop and b its breadth. Let F1, F2 , F3 , F4 . We F3
I
know that the force acting on a conductor carrying current is given by D

F = I( l B) . The forces acting on the part AB and CD are equal and B
C Y
opposite. N

| F1 | = | F2 | = I( l B) = BIl F 2
i.e.,
These two forces are in the opposite direction and in the same plane and hence cancel each other.

The forces F3 and F4 are also equal in magnitude and act along parallel lines but they are at different points.
Their resultant is also zero but they form a couple. Bil
L
| F3 | = | F4 | = I l B
A
Moment of the couple = Either force arm of the couple

a
= BIl AL
B
AL
But = cos or AL = AB cos = b cos
AB
B
= BIl b cos = BI A sin cos Normal

EVERGREEN
SERIES
If there are n turns in the coil, then

= nIAB cos
If is the angle between the direction of the magnetic field and normal to the plane of the loop, then
+ = 90
= 90
cos = sin
= nIAB sin = pB sin
where p = nIA = magnetic moment of the current loop.
= pB sin
Since , p and B are all vector quantities, the above relation may be written as

= pB
(b) (i) We know that the force exerted by the electirc field on the electron is Ee upwards because the electric
field is directed downwards. The magnetic field is directed inwards into the plane of the paper. The force

exerted by the magnetic field Fm = e (V B) . The direction of the force is donwards and its magnitude
is Bev .
For the electron beam to remain undeflected,
Fe = Fm
electrons A Screen
Ee = Bev (They are already opposite)
E
v =
B
(ii) If B is increased the downward due to the magnetic field will increase but electrostatic force will remain
the same, therefore, the electron beam will be deflected downwards.
E
(iii) When the velocity of the electron increases to more than given by v = , the magnetic force will
B
increase although the electric force will remain the same, the electron beam will be deflected downward.
Answer 7.
(a) Here, L = 200 H, C = 2 106 F, R = 10 , Q = ? We know that the quality factor Q is given by
1
L 1 200 1
Q= = = 10,000 = 1000
R
C 10 2 10 6 10
(b) Let there be a closed circuit of resistance R. Let the flux link with the circuit change from 1 to 2. As the flux
linked with the closed circuit changes, an induced emf is produced which sends current on charge in the
closed circuit. Let e be the induced emf produced in the circuit, then
d
e=
dt
d = e dt ... (i)
If I is the current sent in the circuit, then
e
I=
R
e =IR
d = RIdt
d = Rdq, where dq = Idt
1
dQ = d
R
Total charge sent in the circuit Q is
Q
1 2 1
R
Q = dQ = d = [2 1 ]
1
R
0
2 1
Q=
R
Answer 8.
(a) In the figure are shown two coherent sources S1 and S2, a distance d apart. A screen is held at a distance D
from the screen when the two slits are illuminated by light, an interference pattern consisting of alternate dark
and bright fringes of equal width is observed. The point O, where the waves from the two sources reach in
phase is the centre of the fringe system. Consider a point P on the screen having an angular height and a
distance x from O.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Path difference between the disturbances reaching P from the sources S1 and S2 is
p = S2L
S2L
But = sin , f2 L = d sin
d
p = d sin = d (Since is small sin = )
= d. tan
p=d. x
D
As the positron of the point P changes, x also changes and p also changes. P
For the point P to be at a maxima
S1
p = n x
d xn
= n
D D O
D L
x n = n , n = 0, 1, 2, ...
d S2
This gives the distance of different maxima on the screen. Screen
Fringe witdh is the distance between the two consecutive bright fringes is given by
D D
= xn xn 1 = n (n 1)
d d
D
=
d
Width of dark fringes : P will be at a dark fringe if

p = (2n 1) , n = 1, 2, ...
2
d xn
= (2n 1)
D 2
D
x n = (2n 1)
2 d
Fringe width of the dark fringes
D D D
dark = xn xn 1 = (2n 1) [2(n 1) 1) =
2 d 2 d d
D
Distance of the tenth bright fringe = 10 = 10
d
(b) Diffraction at a single slit is shown diagrammatically. In the fig. is shown an
arrangement to get diffraction pattern of a single slit. A parallel beam of
light is incident normally on a single slit. Since the size of the obstacle is of A A
the order of wavelength, diffraction takes place. The diffraction pattern

consists of a very intense maxima flanked by minima and secondary maxima
D
alternately as shown in the fig. If d is the width of the central maxima and , d C
the angle of diffraction, then path difference between the disturbances from B B
the extreme ends is BC as shown in the fig.
BC
Now = sin , BC = d sin
d
The maxima and minima are formed due to the interference between the waves from different parts of the
same wavefront.
For maxima :
For a point to be at maxima, the path difference I

p = (2n + 1) , n = 1, 2, 3,...
2

d sin = (2n + 1)
2

sin = (2n + 1)
2d

= (2n + 1) , since is very small sin = .
2d
This gives us the position of different maxima.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
For minima :
d sin = n, where n = 1, 2, ...
For the first minima
d sin = or =
d
The above relation gives us the positions of the various minima.
Answer 9.
(a) If a1 and a2 the amplitudes of the disturbances reaching a point on the screen, then we know that the resulting
amplitude of the wave formed by superposition is given by
2 2
A 2 = a1 + a2 + 2a1a2 cos , where is the phase difference between the two disturbances.
Further, we know that the intensity I A2.
or I = kA2
Intensity will be maximum if A is maximum
Imax = k A 2max ... (i)
2
and Imin = k A min ... (ii)
Imax A 2max
or =
Imin A 2min
Now, A will be maximum, if = 0
A 2max = a12 + a22 + 2a1a2 = (a1 + a2)2
and A is minimum, if = 180
2
2 2
A 2min = a1 + a2 2a1a2
A 2min = (a1 a2)2
2
Imax (a + a2 )2 a1 + a2
= 1 =
Imin (a1 a2 )2 a1 a2
(b) The variation in the intensity of the diffraction pattern of a single slit pattern is as shown.
0 2 3 4
4 3 2 = = = =
a a a a a a a a
Angular resolution : It is the minimum angle subtended by the two objects lying very close to each other
which can be resolved by the telescope. For a telescope,
1.22
= ,
D
where is the wavelength and D the diameter of the objective. The reciprocal of the limiting value, P resolution
is called Resolving power.
D
RP =
1.22
Answer 10.
(a) Here, for the concave lens
f = 20 cm, u = 30 cm, v = ?
1 1 1
=
v u f
1 1 1
+ =
v 30 20
1 1 1
=
v 20 30
1 3 2 5
= =
v 60 60
60
v= = 12 cm
5
EVERGREEN
SERIES
The image is formed over the object itself because rays after reflection from the concave mirror meet at the
object itself. The point L is the centre of curvature.
Radius of curvature of the mirror = 28 + 12 = 40 cm
3
a = , Power in air = + 5D
(b) g
2
4
a = , Power in the liquid = ?
l
3
To find the power of the lens in the liquid, we have to find the focal length of the lens in the liquid.
1 (a g a l ) 1 1
= a R R ... (i)
fl l 1 2
1 (a g 1) 1 1

R1 R 2
= ... (ii)
fa 1
Dividing (i) by (ii)
3 4

2 3
4 1 3
fa
3 = 6 4 = 1 2= 1
fl =
3 1 8 4
1
2 2
1 1
fa 1
=
fl 4
Pl 1
or =
Pa 4
1 1
Pl = Pa = 5 = 1.25 D
4 4
Decrease in power in the liquid = 5 1.25 = 3.75 D
Answer 11.
(a) In the fig. is shown a curved spherical surface of radius of curvature R which separates the two media of
refractive indices 1 and 2. A point object O is lying at a distance u from the pole P of the spherical surface.
Its image is formed at a distance v from the spherical surface.
N
A
L 2
1
r
O
P N C I
U R
v
From the fig., in OAC, CA is produced
i =+ ... (i)
Again, in IAC, IC is produced
=+r
r= ... (ii)
Now, for refraction at the spherical surface
sin i
= 2
sin r 1
i
or = 2
r 1
1i = 2r ... (iii)
Substituting the values of i and r from (i) and (ii) into (iii), we have
1 ( + ) = 2 ( )

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Since , and are small, they can be replaced by their tangents.

1 (tan + tan ) = 2 (tan tan ) ... (iv)
Since the aperture of the spherical surface is small, N lies close to P
AN AN AN AN
tan = = , tan = , tan =
ON OP PI PC
Putting these values in (iv), we have
1
AN AN AN AN
+ = 2
OP PC PC PI
1 1
or + = 2 2
OP PC PC PI
Now, according to sign convention
PO = u, PI = + V, PC = + R
1 1 2 2
+ =+
u R R v

or 1 + 2 = 2 1 , which is the required relation.
u v R
(b) Power of the combination = 5 3 = 2 D
100
Focal length of the combination = 50 cm
2
The lens is convex.
Now, u = 30 cm, v = ?, f = 50 cm
1 1 1
Now, =
v u f
1 1 1
+ =
v 30 50
1 1 1 2
= =
v 50 30 150
150
v= = 75 cm
2
i.e., the image is virtual
v 75
Now, m= = = 2.5 cm
u 30
Size of the image is 2.5 times the size of the object.
SECTION-C
Answer 12.
(a) The various postulates of Bohrs theory of the hydrogen atom are :
1. An atom consists of a central nucleus where the whole mass and +ve charge of the atom is concentrated.
2. The electrons revolve around the nucleus in circular orbits and the electrostatic force supplies the
necessary centripetal force.

e2 mv 2
i.e., k. 2 =
r r
(+e)
e2
(e)
k = mv2 ... (i)
r
1
where k=
4 0
3. The electron can revolve around the nucleus only in those orbits in which its angular momentum is
quantised.
h
i.e., mvr = n where n is an integer. ... (ii)
2
4. The emission or absorption of energy takes place when electron jumps from one state to the other. If Ei
and Ef are the energies of the electron in the initial and the final orbits, then
Ei Ef = h ... (iii)
where is the frequency of the radiation emitted.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
nh
From (i) v= , putting this value in (i), we get
2mr
2 2
ke 2 = m.n h n2 h2
r = ... (iv)
r 4 2 m 2 r 2 4mke 2
It is clear from this relation that
r n2
If rn1 and rn2 are the radius of the orbit for n = n1 and n = n2 respectively, then
rn1 n12
=
n22
rn2
(b) Characteristic X-ray spectra : Characteristic X-ray spectra consists of two series of spectral lines called the
K-series and L-series. Each series contains a small number of line known as K, K ...; L, L etc. The
wavelength of the K-series ~ 1 while those in the L-series is about 10 . These wavelengths are characteristics
of the element struck by the cathode ray during the production of X-rays.
When the electron emitted from the cathode gains energy enough to strike the anticathode with a tremendous
velocity, it may eject an electron from the K-shell of the atoms causing a vacancy. Therefore, an electron from
the neighbouring L-shells jumps into the K-shell emitting an X-ray photon. The energy of this photon is
equal to the difference in the energy of the electron in the L-shell and K-shell. Similar transition may take
place from M-shell or N-shell into K-shell giving rise to the different members of the L-shell, when a vacancy
is created in electrons from the M-shell or N-shell may jump into L-shell to produce L-series.
Answer 13.
(a) (i) (A) Moderator : The function of a moderator is to slow down the neutron emitted in the nuclear fission.
The fission nuclear reaction starts only with slow down neutron. The underlying principle is that a
moving particle transfers whole of its kinetic energy to a particle of equal mass at rest on collision
with it. Heavy water or graphite is used as a moderator.
(B) Control rod : The control rods in a nuclear reactor control the rate at which the nuclear fission
reactor takes place. This is done with the help of control rods which are usually of cadmium. Cadmium
can capture for neutrons. The rate of reaction is controlled by absorbing the extra neutrons.
(C) Coolant : During the fission reaction, a large amount of heat is produced. The function of a coolant
is to remove their considerable amount of heat. The coolants usually used are water, carbon dioxide,
air etc.
A balanced nuclear fission reaction is as given below :
235
92 U + 10 n 141
56 Ba +
92
36 Kr + 3 10 n + Q, where Q is the energy released in the fission process.
(b) Activity of a radioactive substance is defined as the rate of disintegration of the atoms of the radioactive
substance.
dN
A = = N
dt
The activity depends upon the number of radioactive atoms of the radioactive substance present at any instant
of time. As the number of atoms decreases, the activity of the substance also decreases with time as shown.
Half life of a radioactive substance is defined as the time in which the number of atoms or activity of the
1
radioactive substances decreases to of the original activity.
2
Activity after one half life is
1
A 1 = A0
2
1 1 1
After two half lives, A 2 = A1 = . A0
Activity
2 2 2
2
A 2 = A0
1
2
Similarly, activily after n half lives will be
n
A n = A0
1 Time
2
The activity will become zero only after infinite time.

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Anwer 14.
(a) Davisson Germar Experiment : This experiment was +
H.T.
performed by Davisson and Germer to establish the wave
nature of particles-taken to be electrons. The experimental
arrangement is as shown in the fig. Electrons emitted by Nickel
the filament are accelerated to a desired velocity by Target
applying a suitable potential from a H.T. battery. A Electron
collimated beam of these electrons is then made to fall on gun
L.T.
a nickel crystal. These electrons get scattered in different Diffracted Vacuum
Movable
directions by the atoms beam of the crystal. The intensity Collector
electron Chamber
beam
of the electron beam is measured by the electron detector To galvanometer
the output of which is fed to a galvanometer. Thus, the
deflection is proportional to the intensity of the electrons. The apparatus is enclosed in an evacuated chamber.
The intensity of the scattered beam is determined for different values of the angle of scattering. It is found that
intensity of the scattered beam is maximum, when accelerating voltage is 54 V and angle of scattering is .
180 50
= = 65
2
For nickel d = 0.93
According to Braggs law
2d sin =
= 2 0.93 1010 65
= 2 0.93 1010 0.9063 = 1.685
, according to the de-Broglie hypothesis
h h h 6.62 1034
= = = =
mv 2 mE 2 meV 2 9 1031 1.6 1019 54
6.62 1034 1025 6.62 1010

= = 1.68
39.44 39.44
Thus, the experimental and the predicted values are in close agreement. This, verifies the de-Broglie hypothesis.
(b) Here, m = 1.0 g = 103 kg, E = ?
According to Einsteins mass energy relation
E = mc2 = 103 (3 108)2 = 9 1013 J
9 1013
Energy in kWh = kWh = 2.5 107 kWh
3.6 106
Answer 15.
(a) Y= A
i.e., A NOTgate negates the input.
Truth Table
A Y
0 1
1 0
A NOT gate cannot be realised with the help of diodes. A transistor has to be used to realise it. The circuit
diagram of a transistor for the realisation of NOT gate is as shown. An electronic circuit of a NOT gate
using n-p-n transistor is as shown in the fig.
As is clear from the fig. the base of the transistor is connected to the input through a base resistor Rb. The
output is taken between C and the earth terminal. The values of Rb and Rc are so chosen that if the input is
zero transistor is in the off mode.
Rc
C
A Rb B Ouput
5V

EVERGREEN
SERIES
When the input is zero the base of the transistor is also earthed. Since the emitter base junction is not forward
biased, no emitter on collector current flows. The voltage at C will be + ve w.r.t. earth i.e., the output will be 1.
When A is connected to the + ve terminal of the input battery i.e., A is 1, the emitter base junction is forward
biased. A current flows through the emitter and the collector. The transistor is in the saturation state. This
causes a voltage drop of 5 V in opposite phase to the collector battery. This makes the potential of point C
zero is i.e., output is zero.
Thus, the above circuit performs the function of a NOT gate.
(b) , the current gain for a transistors is defined as the ratio of change in the collector current to the change in
the emitter current.
Ic
= . Its value is always less than one.
Ie
the current gain in a common emitter configuration is defined as the ratio of change in collector to the
change in the base current.
I c
= I
b
Now in a transistor
Ie = Ib + Ic
Ie = Ib + Ic
Dividing by Ic, on both side
I e Ib
I c = I + 1
c
1 1
= +1

1 1
1 =

1 1
=

or = , which is the required relation.
1

EVERGREEN
SERIES

PART-I
Answer 1.
A0 A 0 3A0 3
(A) (i) (d) C = = = = C
d t 1 2d 2
d d
3
(ii) (b) The slope of I V graph gives the recoprocal of resistance. Therefore resistance of the metallic
wire is more at temperature T2.
T 1 > T1
(iii) (b) (By definition)
1 1 1

(iv) (c) f air = (1.5 1) R1 R 2 ... (i)
4
1.5
1 3 1 1
fw
=
4 R R
1 2
3
1 1 1
= .. (ii)
8 R1 R 2
fw 1 8

f air = 2 1 = 4. fw = 4 20 = 80 cm
100 100
Change in power = = 3.75 D
20 80
(v) (b) Since the stopping potential is 4V, energy of the photoelectrons is 4 eV
0 = 5.5 4.0 = 1.5 eV
= 1.5 1.6 1019 = 2.4 1019 J
E
20 10 A B
(B) (i) E= 2 = 2 102 V m1 AB. 20 V 10 V
5 10
(ii) A potentiometer is said to be sensitive if can measure very small potential differences in microvolt. To
make the potentiometer sensitive, its potential gradient must be reduced. The length of the potentiometer
wire must be increased.
V W [ML2T 2 ]
(iii) R= = = = [ML2T3A2]
I IQ [A.AT]
l 4l
(iv) R =. =
a D2
Since, the resistivity is the same for both the wires (same material).
l
R
D2
2
l1 D2 D 1 3 2 9
. 2 = =
R1 l
= 2 . 2 = 1
R2 D1 l2 l2 D1 2 2 8
(v) Examples :
A diamagnetic substance moves from stronger to the weaker part of the magnetic field and a paramagnetic
substance moves from weaker to stronger part of the magnetic field.
(vi) The induced emf depends upon (i) No. of turns in the coil (ii) Area of the coil (iii) Speed of rotation
(iv) Strength of the magnetic field.
(vii) The emergent beam is shown in the fig. Dispersion takes place. A
t
e ligh
Whit
R
B Prism C V

EVERGREEN
SERIES
(viii)The required expression is, chromatic aberration = fr fv = f where f is the mean focal length of the
lens.
(ix) The incident light is refracted and then suffers a number of total internal reflections before it comes out.
emergent light
Incident light
(x) We will prefer to use a convex mirror as it provides a large field of view because the image of the object
formed is quite small.
(xi) We know that for a material particle, de-Broglie is given by
h
=
p
h
p=

2
p2 h
KE, K = = Which is the required relation.
2m 2 2 m
106 90 16
(xii) No of particles emitted is = = =4
4 4
No. of particles emitted is = 6. P
(xiii) Rest mass energy of the proton, antiproton pair
= 937.8 2 = 1875.6 MeV d h
Kinetic energy of both of them = 2.67 + 2.67 = 5.34

Energy of the photon = 1875.6 + 5.34 = 1880.94 MeV
R
(xiv) From the fig. (R + h)2 = R2 + d2 R
2 2
R + h + 2Rh = R + d 2 2
C
or d 2 = 2Rh
d = 2Rh , since h is very small compared with R.
(xv) The Boolean expression for the XOR gate is
y = A.B + B.A A
It gives an output only when, one of the input is in 1 state. y = A.B + B.A
The truth table of XOR gate is a given below : B
A B A.B A.B Y = A . B +A . B
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 1 1
0 1 1 1 1
1 1 0 0 0
PART-II
SECTION-A
Answer 2.
(a) Consider two points A and B in the electric field of a charge q0, placed at origin O. Let a +ve charge q be
moved from at B. At any instant, let the charge q be at the point and let it moved through a small vector

distance PQ = dl .

If E is the electric field at P then the force acting on the charge q is

F = qF
Small work done dW in taking the charge from P to Q is

dW = F . dl = q E . dl = q Edl cos ...(i)

where Q is the angle between E and dl
EVERGREEN
SERIES
From the fig Let QN OP. Let PN = dr

dr
Then = cos (180 ) = cos
dl
dr = dl cos ...(ii)
Putting the value dl cos = dr in (i) we get
Y
dW = q E dr
1 q0 1 1
dW = q. . 2 dr = qq0 2 dr B
Q E
40 r 40 r rA N P
Total work done in moving the charge q from A to B r dr
r rA A
qq0 B 1
4 0 r 2
W = dr O q0 X
r
A
r
1 r 2 +1 B 1
r
1 B
= qq0 = qq0
4 0 2 + 1 r 4 0 r r
A A
1 1 1
W = qq0
4 0 r
B Ar
Clearly the line integral of the electric field between the points is independent of the path conecting A and B
but depends only on the initial and final positions of the points A and B. The electric field is thus conservative
in nature.
(b) The equipotential surfaces of a uniform electric field are as
shown in the fig. The equipotential
surfaces consist of equidistant parallel planes perpendicular to
the direction of the electirc field. E
4V 3V 2V 1V
Two equipotential surfaces cannot intersect because then there
will be two directions of the electric field at the point where they
intersect which is not possible. x x x
Answer 3.
(a) Two equal charge Q each are placed at A and B. q is a charge placed at P. Since all the three charges are in
equilibrium. The force on any charge due to the other two charges is zero. Total force on the charge Q at B is
1 Qq 1 Q2 q
= + . =0
4 0 (a r ) 2 4 0 a 2
Qq Q2
=
(a r )2 a2
(a r )2
or q =Q. ... (i)
a2
Also since the force on the charge q is zero
1 Qq 1 Qq
=
40 r 2 40 (a r )2 A P B
Q r Q
q (a r)
1 1
=
r ar a
r =ar
a
r =
2
a
Putting this value of r = in (i), we get
2
2
a
a
2 a2 Q
q =Q 2
= Q. 2
= .
a 4a 4

EVERGREEN
SERIES
(b) There are two Kirchhoffs laws.

(i) Law of current : At any point in an electrical circuit, the algebraic sum of the currents meeting at a point
must be zero
i.e., i = 0
(ii) Law of emf : In any closed mesh or net-work of conductors, the algebraic sum of the products of the
various resistances and the respective currents flowing through them is equal to the total emf of the
sources in the closed mesh.
Answer 4.
(a) In the fig. is shown a cell of internal resistance r connected in series with a variable resistance R. A voltmeter
V connected across the voltmeter measures the potential difference across the terminals of the cell. When
the key K is not inserted, the cell is in an open circuit. The reading of the voltmeter gives the emf E of the
cell. When the key K is inserted, a current begins to flow in the circuit. As a result, the reading of the voltmeter
decreases. The decrease is due to potential drop ir inside the cell, r being the internal resistance of the cell. If
V is the new reading than
V = E ir
where V = iR
V +
or i = V
R
V
V =E r E
R
V 1 + = E
r
R
E R K
or V=
r
1+
R
r
(i) Clearly as R increases decreases and V also increases. When R is quite large compared to r, V
R
approaches E.
r
(ii) When R decreases, the factor increases and hence, V also decreases as is.
R
Shown by the curve b.
(iii) The emf of a cell is a constant quantity and it does not depend upon the resistance R. The graph is as
shown in fig.
Y
X
O R O R
(b)(i) When the balance point is not obtained anywhere on the potentiometer, it means that no length of the
potentiometer wire is able to balance the emf of the cell. It is possible that (i) the potential gradient is
small. The potential gradient can be increased by increasing the current with the help of rheostat.
(ii) It is possible that the emf of the auxiliary battery is less than the emf of the cell whose emf of is to be
determined.
(iii) In order to shift the balance point from the second wire to the third wire, the potential gradient must be
decreased. This can be achieved by decreasing the current in the potentiometer wire.
Answer 5.
(a) Let R be the effective resistance of the combination between A and B. 1 C
A
Since the combination consists of an infinite symmetrical loops, removing
one loop will not alter the effective resistance. Leaving aside the first
1 R
loop, the remaining combination will also have an effective resistance R.
Thus we can show the combination as shown in the fig. 1
B
D

EVERGREEN
SERIES
1 R
The resistance of 1 and R in parallel i.e., is in series with the two resistances of 1 each.
1+ R
Effective resistance of the combination is
R R 2 + 3R
=1+1+ = 2+ =
1+ R 1+ R 1+ R
But effective resistance is R
2 + 3R
R=
1+ R
2
R + R = 2 + 3R
2
R 2R 2 = 0 which gives
2 4+8 22 3
R= = = 1 3
2 2
=1+ 3 (leaving the ve sign because R cannot be ve.)
= 1 + 1.732 = 2.732
(b) The importance of the Hyptersis loop : Hyrtersis loop is graph between
the magnetising field H and magnetic induction B developed in specimen
when specimen is taken through a cycle of magnetisation. The loop is as B A
shown in the fig. In the fig. OB represent the retentivity of the substance.
C
It is a measure of the magnetisation remaining in the material when H
O F
magnetising field H = 0. OC represents the reverse magnetising field.
required to destroy the residual magnetisim. It can also be proved that D E
the area of the B H or I H represents the loss of energy per cycle of
magnetisation.
The importance of the hysteresis loop lies in the fact that it helps us in selecting a proper material for a
definite purpose.
For example for making permanent magnets, we prefer steel because it has a reasonably high retentivity and
high coercivity. It is not easily demagnetised by stray external fields. A permanent magnet does not undergo
cycles of magnetisation. Hence area of the hystersis loop is immaterial.
The material for cores of electromagnets are usually of iron because it has a high retentivity even for low
magnetising fields. Iron cores are usually used in a transformer. Also because of small area of B H loop
which represents the loss of energy. The core of a transformer undergoes cycles of magnetisation.
Answer 5.
(a) In the fig. ia shown a labelled diagram of a cyclotron. A cyclotron is an accelerating machine used for
accelerating heavy charged particles. In this machine the charged particle is allowed to fall through a given
potential difference again and again and thus it gains energy. The path of the particle is turned using a
magnetic field.
Let a particle of mass m and carrying a charge Q enters a
uniform magnetic field perpendicular to the plane of the Magnetic field out Deflection plate
paper. An electric field is produced between the two dees. of the paper
As the particle croses the gap, it gains energy and enters
Exit port
the dee with the acquired velocity. It moves inside the dee
without gaining energy in a circular path and comes out of
the dee with the same speed. However immediately at that
time, the polarity of dees is reversed and the charged Charged
particle
particle is further accelerated. For continuous acceleration P
the frequency of the oscillator must be such that the
polarity of dee is reversed the moment the particle comes
out of a dee. The particle is finally taken out of the exit port. D1 D2
Under the influence of the magnetic field for any orbit.
mv 2 mv
BQv = or r =
r BQ OSCILLATOR
r . mv m
t = = =
v vBQ BQ

EVERGREEN
SERIES
2m
Time period of the oscillator T = 2t =
BQ
Frequency of the oscillator.
1 BQ
n = =
T 2m
The electron cannot be accelerated with a cyclotron because it mass is less. As they gain energy their mass
increases according to the relation.
m0
m =
v2
1 2
c
As speed v increases, the time for which the electron remains inside the dee increase. However the frequency
of oscillator is fixed, the polarity of the dees changes much earlier and the electron comes out much later.
Hence, continuous acceleration is not possible.
(b) Since the currents in all the three wires are in the same direction, there will be force of repulsion between any
two of them. The wire C will exert a force of repulsion on B towards A and A will exert a force of repulsion on
B towards C. The force per unit length experienced by the wire B due to the current in A.
2 10 10
F1 = 107 = 2 104 Nm1 away from B towards C.
10 102
Similarly, the force F2 acting on B due to current flowing in C. A B C
10 7 2 10 20
F2 = = 4 104 Nm1 acting towards A.
10 10 2
Net force acting per unit length on B. 10 A 10 A 20 A
F = F2 F1
= 4 104 Nm1 2 104 Nm1
= 2 104 Nm towards A
Answer 7.
10 cm 10 cm
(a) Here, N = 50, A = 2.5 m2, = 60 rad s1, B = 0.3 T, R = 500 .
The flux passing through the coil when the face of the coil is perpendicular to the direction of the magnetic
lines of force.
= NAB
= 50 2.5 0.3 weber = 37.5 wb
(b) If e0 is the maximum induced emf produced in the coil, then
e 0 = NAB = 50 2.5 0.3 60
e 0 = 2250 V
e 2250
Maximum current, I0 = 0 = A = 4.5 A
R 500
Answer 8.
(a) When unpolarised or ordinary light is incident at the Brewsters angle on a transparent medium, it is reflected
as well as refracted. The reflected ray is fully polarised having vibrations in a plane perpendicular to the
plane of the paper whereas the refracted ray is partially polarised. That the reflected ray is fully polarised can
be seen by placing analyser is in the path of the reflected ray. When the analyser is rotated about the reflected
ray, the intensity of light decreases from a maximum to zero.
The reflected ray and the refracted rays are mutually perpendicular.
Now, according to the law of refraction
sin i p
=
sin rp
Since the refracted and the reflected rays are mutually perpendicular,
ip + rp + 90 = 180 (Sum of the angles on a straight line is 180)
ip + rp = 90
r p = 90 ip
sin rp = sin (90 ip) = cos ip
sin i p
= = tan ip
cos i p
Refractive index of the medium is equal to the tangent of the angle of polarisation.
EVERGREEN
SERIES
I0
(b) Here, I1 = I0, I2 = R
2
I0 I P
I max = I1 + I2 + 2 I1I 2 = I0 + + 2 I0 0
2 2 Ip 1p
I0 1
= I0 + + 2 I0 = I0 1 + + 2 rp
2 2 Q
I I 0
= 0 [2 + 1 + 2 2] = [3 + 2 1.414]
2 2 L
I0
= [5.828] = I0 [2.91] = 2.91 I0
2
and Intensity at the minima
I
Imin = I1 + I2 2 I1I2 = I0 + 0 2 I0 = I0 [1 + 0.5 1.414]
2
Imin = 0.086 I0
Thus, the intensity at the maxima will decrease from 4I0 to 2.91 I0 and that at the minima will increase from 0
to 0.086. Thus, the contrast between the fringes will decrease.
Answer 9.
(a) When unpolarised light is incident on a polarid, the intensity of the light transmitted through it is reduced.
Since the two polaroids are crossed, the light passing through the first polaroid is blocked by the second. If
I0 is the intensity of light incident on the first polaroid the intensity of light passing through the second
I0
polaroid is . If a polaroid sheet is introduced at an angle with the polariser, then the intensity of light
2
transmitted through P3 is by malus law is
I = I cos2
I
I = 0 cos2
2
The intensity of the light emitted through the analyser P3
I = I cos2 (90 ) = I sin2 ()
I I
I = 0 cos2 sin2 = 0 sin2 2
2 8
(b) The image of an object is AB formed with the help of a single lens of short focal length as shown below. The
object to be viewed is made to lie between the optical centre and focus of the lens and its position adjusted
so that image AB is formed at the least distance of distinct vision.
Magnifying power
tan
M= = , because and are very small and can be replaced by their tangents.
tan
A B
B O
= AB
B O
AB v
M= =
AB u
Now for the convex lens
u=u
v=D
f=f
1 A
1 1
=
v u f
A
1 1 1
+ =
D u f
D D B B O F
1+ = u
u f
D
D D
= 1 +
f
Convex lens
u
D
or M = 1 + , which is the required relation.
f
EVERGREEN
SERIES
Answer 10.
(a) The ray diagram for the primary and secondary rainbow is Violet
as shown in the fig It is clear from the diagram that primary Light
Secondary
from
rainbow
rainbow is formed after one internal reflection whereas the
secondary rainbow is formed after two internal reflections. Red
Sun
In the primary rainbow the red is on the outer side whereas
in the secondary rainbow red is on the inner side and violet
on the outer. Red
rainbow
Primary
(b) Light from the source after suffering refraction from the
surface comes out of the surface only if it is incident on the 55 Violet
R
surface at an angle less than the critical angle. Let OA = r 42
be the radius of the circle, then V
Observer
r
= tan C
h
r = h tan C
1 3
also sin C = =
4 B
O
A
C = 0.7500
C = 48.6
and tan 48.6 = 1.134
r = 7 1.134 = 7.94 cm
Area of the surface from where light emergies out = 7.94 7.94 cm2
= 197.9 cm2
SECTION-C
Answer 11.
(a) A single lens always suffers from chromatic aberration. An acromatic combination of lenses always consists
of two lenses of different materials and different focal lengths. Let the two lenses be of focal lengths f1 and f2
and having dispersive power 1 and 2. Further let for fv fr and r the focal length for the voilet and red
colours and corresponding refractive index for the first lens and fv, fr, v and r the corresponding quantitites
for the second lens. Then according to Lens makers formula
1 1 1
fv
= (v 1) R R
1 2
1 ( v 1). 1
= ( 1) f ... (i)
fv 1
1 1 1
where f1 is the mean focal length of the lens and the lens and the mean refractive index, =
R1 R 2 ( 1) f
Similarly,
1 ( r 1) 1
= . ... (ii)
fr ( 1) f1
and for the second lens
1 1 1
= v . ... (iii)
fv 1 f 2
1 r 1 1
= . ... (iv)
f r 1 f2
If Fv and Fr denote the local length of the combination for the violet and red colour, then for the combination
1 1 1
= +
Fv f v f v
1 1 1
or = +
Fr fr f
r

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Now for the combination to be achromatic

1 1
=
Fv Fr
1 1 1 1
+ +
fv fv = f f r
r
v 1 1 v 1 1 r 1 1 r 1 1
. + = . +
1 f1 1 f2 1 f1 1 f2
v r 1 v r 1
or . + . =0
1 f1 ( 1) f 2
1 2 v r
+ = 0. 1 = 1
f1 f2
1 v u
(i) = 2 2 = 1
f1 f2
1 2
Since, =
f1 f2
It is possible only if one lens in the combination is concave.
f1
(ii) = 1
f2 2
(b) It is a defect of the eye due to which it cannot see the nearby objects clearly but can see far objects clearly.
For such an eye there is near point. This defect due to
(i) increase in the focal length of the eye lens.
(ii) the eye ball is short.
This refect defect is removed by using a convex lens of suitable focal length.
Answer 12.
VS
(a) mass of the reactants = 2.014120 + 3.016049 = 5.030169 amu
Mass of the products = 4.002603 + 1.008665 = 5.011268 amu
Stopping potential
Mass defect = 5.030169 5.011268

m = 0.018901 amu
Energy released in the process is = 0.018901 931.5 MeV
= 17.6 MeV
(b) The fig. shows the graph between stopping potential and frequency of v0

the incident radiation. This graph is drawn using the Einsteins O
Frequency
Photoelectric equation.
hv = hv0 + eVS
h h
VS = v v0
e e
h
Clearly the graph between VS and v is a straight line, the slope of which will give the value of . The slope
e
h
of this line is tan . It gives us the value of
e
h
= tan
e
h = e tan
Answer 13.
(a) When the electron revolves around the proton with a speed v in a circle of radius r, the electrostatic force
supplies the necessary centripelel force.
e2 mv 2 1
k 2 = where k =
r r 4 0
ke 2
or r =
mv 2

EVERGREEN
SERIES
Further, since the angular momentim is quantised

nh
mvr =
2
nh
v =
2mr
nh
v = 2
. mv 2 (+e)
2 . ke m r
(e)
2
2ke
v =
nh
1 e2
v = 2 . .
4 0 nh
e2
v =
2 0 nh
Putting the various values we get the speed v in the first orbit to be
1.6 1.6 1038 1.6 1.6
v = = 108 = 2.19 106 ms1
34 12 2 6.6 8.85
2 6.6 10 8.85 10
6
v 2.17 10 1
= = 7.233 103 is
c 3 108 137
1
v = c
137
(b) The particle is closest to the mucleus, when the whole of its kinetic energy is converted into the potential
energy between the particle and the nucleus.
k . 2e . Ze 2k Ze 2
PE = =
rc rc
13
K.E. = 5.5 1.6 10 J
2k Ze2
= 5.5 1.6 1013
rc
9 109 2 79 1.6 1.6 10 38 9 2 79 1.6 1.6
rc = = 1016 m
5.5 1.6 10 13 5.5 1.6
= 4.14 1014 m
Answer 14.
(a) The energy level diagram of the hydrogen atom is drawn here
n= 0
n=4 0.85 ev
n=3 1.5 ev
n=2 3.4 ev
Emissions
lines of
Balmer series
Absorption
line of
Lyman series
n=1 13.6 ev
(b) (i) according to the radioctive decay law, the rate of disintegration i.e., number of atoms disintegrating per
sec of the radioactive substance is proportional to the number of atoms present at that time.
i.e., dN N
dt
dN
or = N, where is called the radioactive decay constant.
dt
dN
or = dt
N
EVERGREEN
SERIES

N t
dN
= dt
N
N0 0
[ln N]N
N = t
0
N
ln = t
N0
N = N0 et which is the required relation.
(ii) (1) , and
(2) , and
Question 15.
(a) The T.V. signals are high frequency signals. The frequency of TV signals 54-72 MHz. UHF TV. signals
174 216 MHz and even higher. P
Suppose a TV tower is located at point on the earth surface with the Tower
transmitter at the point P as shown in the fig. Let OP = h, be the height of
h
the antenna when TV transmission is telecast the signal can reach upto d
the location A or B. There will be no reception beyond points A and B. O
The distance OA = OB = d is the range of TV transmission. If C is the

A Earth B
centre of the earth, the OC = R = radius of the earth. h the height of the R
tower. The from the fig.
PC2 = PB2 + BC2 C
(h + R)2 = PB2 + R2
h2 + R2 + 2hR = d2 + R2
or d= 2h R which gives us the range of TV transmission. L
(b) The labelled circuit diagram of an npn transistor being used as oscillator C
B NPN
is as shown. +
E
The frequency of the waves produced by the oscillator is given by B2
1
f= L C
2 LC
B K
The coil L and the coil L are indirectively coupled. The coil L is called + 1
the feed back coil.

Isc 100% Success in Physics

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Isc 100% Success in Physics

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EVERGREEN MODEL TEST PAPERS

SOLUTION FOR EVERGREEN MODEL TEST PAPERS

EVERGREEN MODEL TEST PAPER - 1

(1) e-mail : epildelhi@gmail.com

At point P on the axis of the loop, where

(b) Given, q1 = + 15 C = 15 106C and q2 = + 9 C = 9 106C

(2) e-mail : epildelhi@gmail.com

(3) e-mail : epildelhi@gmail.com

Using Kirchhoffs second rule,

(5) e-mail : epildelhi@gmail.com

(6) e-mail : epildelhi@gmail.com

W0 2.14 eV 2.14 1.6 10 19

(7) e-mail : epildelhi@gmail.com

6.60 1034 3 108 19.89 1026 19.80 10 26

Most stable nuclei

(8) e-mail : epildelhi@gmail.com

(ii) Number of atoms present in 5 g of the sample

235 Avogadros number 6.023 1023

The output is amplified and has a phase change or (180).

Input A Input B Output of Output of

EVERGREEN MODEL TEST PAPER - 2

(10) e-mail : epildelhi@gmail.com

(xi) Energy is given by

(11) e-mail : epildelhi@gmail.com

(12) e-mail : epildelhi@gmail.com

(ii) Aluminium is paramagnetic.

Total current passing through the closed path of radius r is

Impedance of the circuit. Z = R 2 + X 2L = 112 + 112 = 11 2

Voltage amplitude, V0 = 2 Vrms = 2 220 V

(13) e-mail : epildelhi@gmail.com

Plane polarised light

Angle subtended by theimage at the least distance of distinct vision

(15) e-mail : epildelhi@gmail.com

(16) e-mail : epildelhi@gmail.com

(b) The fission of 98 Mo can be represented as

The disintegration energy in the fission of 98 Mo is given by

(17) e-mail : epildelhi@gmail.com

EVERGREEN MODEL TEST PAPER - 3

(18) e-mail : epildelhi@gmail.com

From (i) and (ii), we have

(19) e-mail : epildelhi@gmail.com

(20) e-mail : epildelhi@gmail.com

(b) In a LR circuit, Z = L22 + R 2

(a) (b) (c)

(21) e-mail : epildelhi@gmail.com

(22) e-mail : epildelhi@gmail.com

(23) e-mail : epildelhi@gmail.com

(24) e-mail : epildelhi@gmail.com

(b) Here, m ( 42 He ) = 4.002604 amu

Y = A . B + A . B which is the Boolean expresion for the XOR gate.

(25) e-mail : epildelhi@gmail.com

EVERGREEN MODEL TEST PAPER - 4

(ii) The required relation is

(26) e-mail : epildelhi@gmail.com

(27) e-mail : epildelhi@gmail.com

(28) e-mail : epildelhi@gmail.com

(29) e-mail : epildelhi@gmail.com

E2V 200 200

(30) e-mail : epildelhi@gmail.com

8.835 103 2 0.5 103 m

(31) e-mail : epildelhi@gmail.com

up into its constituent colours. It is known as dispersion.

(32) e-mail : epildelhi@gmail.com

2EK 2 1.32 1.6 1019